542
CAM2 MEASURE TECHNICAL INSTITUTE V ERSION 1.0 BASIC MEASUREMENT T RAINING WORKBOOK FARO LASER T RACKER JANUARY 2008 STUDENTS BOOK

08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

TECHNICAL INSTITUTE

VERSION 1.0BASIC MEASUREMENT TRAINING WORKBOOK

FARO LASER TRACKERJANUARY 2008STUDENTS BOOK

CAM2MEASURE

Page 2: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 3: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

©FARO Technologies Inc. 2005-2008. All rights reserved.

No part of this publication may be reproduced, or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission of FARO Technologies Inc.

FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE FARO LASER TRACKER AND ITS MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS.

IN NO EVENT SHALL FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE FARO LASER TRACKER OR ITS MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO FARO TECHNOLOGIES INC. REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN.

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of FARO Technologies Inc.

FaroArm® CAM2® SPC Graph® and SPC Process® are registered trademarks of FARO Technologies Inc.

Windows® and Excel® are registered trademarks of Microsoft, Inc.

DATAPAGE® is a registered trademark of Brown & Sharpe, Inc.

Pro/ENGINEER® is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation.

CATIA® is a registered trademark of Dassault Systemes.

Acrobat® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc.

FARO Technologies, Inc. Internal Control File Locations:F:\CONTROL\REFERENC\08PRODUC\ENGLISH\Prdpub13\08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Basic Measurement Training Workbook for the Student - January 2008.pdfF:\CONTROL\RECORDS\05MANUFA\PARTSPEC\XH17-0361.pdf

Page 4: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 5: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

• Course Introduction:

• This course will explain DIRECT (Dimensional Inspection Reverse Engineering and Control Tool) applications of FARO Laser Tracker.

• This course is designed to provide the basic skills necessary to measure a part, check a part, and compare measurements to nominal CAD files.

• There will be lectures, as well as hands-on exercises that will allow you to practice the skills that you have learned.

Page 6: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 7: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F AC

D B

G

P1

P2

P3

P4

Page 8: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

S1

S2

Page 9: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

Course ChecklistChapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

❑ FARO Laser Tracker Safety❑ Laser Radiation Emission

❑ Laser Aperture Labels❑ Laser Emission Indicator

❑ Rear Composite Label❑ Lifting the Tracker❑ Pinch Points❑ Hot Plugging❑ EMC Warning

❑ Care of the FARO Laser Tracker❑ Optical Target Care

❑ Cleaning the Optical Targets❑ Standard SMRs and RetroProbes (Silver Coated)❑ Economy SMRs (Gold Coated)❑ Break Resistant SMRs (Gold Coated)

❑ Cleaning the Trackers Optics❑ Storage❑ Transportation

❑ Understanding Measurement Accuracy❑ Effects of Atmospheric Conditions❑ Environmental Effects❑ Targets❑ Physical Changes in the Part or Stand❑ Backsight Readings❑ Measurement Strategy

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview❑ FARO Laser Tracker❑ Setting up the FARO Laser Tracker

❑ Smart Warm-up❑ Powering Down

❑ Important Topics - Hardware Overview❑ FARO Laser Tracker Specifications

Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical❑ Practical Exercise

Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X❑ Using this manual❑ Starting CAM2 Measure X❑ Screen Layout

i

Page 10: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

❑ Graphics Field❑ DRO Window❑ Pull-down Menus❑ Toolbar Buttons❑ Output Control Bar❑ Status Bar❑ Control Bars

❑ CAM2 Measure X HELP❑ About CAM2

❑ Hotkeys - Viewing❑ Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)❑ Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)❑ Hotkeys - Commands❑ Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation❑ Operational Checks❑ Compensations

❑ Quick Backsight❑ Self Comp❑ Pointing Compensation❑ ADM

❑ Operational Checks❑ When to Perform

❑ Important Topics - Laser Checks and CompensationChapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Compensations❑ Self Comp❑ Pointing❑ Pointing Compensation❑ ADM❑ Operational Checks❑ Static Repeatability❑ Dynamic Repeatability

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement❑ Types of Features

❑ 2D Features❑ 3D Features

ii

Page 11: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

❑ Compensation❑ Plane Compensation❑ Compensation of a 2D Feature

❑ Review Features❑ Printing❑ Erasing

❑ Important Topics - Feature MeasurementChapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

❑ Practical Exercises❑ Execute Mode❑ View Control❑ Review Features

Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements❑ Coordinate Systems

❑ What is a Coordinate System?❑ Alignments❑ Feature Reducibility

❑ Feature Reducibility Exercise❑ Constructions

❑ What is a Construction?❑ Common Constructions

❑ Dimensions❑ What is a Dimension?❑ Tricky Dimensions

❑ Important Topics - Basic Part MeasurementChapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Setting the Alignment❑ Feature Measurements❑ Constructions❑ Changing Labels from Review Features❑ Dimensions❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save The Measurements❑ Additional Coordinate Systems❑ Switching between coordinate systems.❑ Save Again

Chapter 11: Checking a Part❑ Nominals

❑ What is a Nominal?❑ Types of Nominals

iii

Page 12: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

❑ CAD to Part Alignments❑ CAD=Part

❑ Important Topics - Checking a PartChapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Getting the Nominals❑ Setting the Alignment❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measuring Features and Adding Nominals❑ Adding a Nominal through Review Features❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 13: Move Device Position❑ Purpose

❑ Moving the Device❑ Realign the Part to the Device

❑ Important Topics - Move Device PositionChapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Importing CAD File❑ Setting the Coordinate System❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measure Features for the Move Device Position❑ Performing the Move Device Position Command

❑ Add Measurements to an Existing FeatureChapter 15: Tips and Tricks

❑ The Measurement Track❑ Examine the Task❑ Setup Considerations❑ Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment❑ Data Collection❑ Data Output❑ Other Hints

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD❑ Why Work with CAD?❑ CAD Terminology

❑ Types of CAD Data❑ Standard CAD Data File Formats

❑ IGES❑ 3DM❑ VDA

iv

Page 13: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

v

❑ Measurement Template❑ Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)❑ Automatic Nominal Association❑ Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD

Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Translating an IGES File❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment❑ Save The Measurements❑ Measure the Remaining Features❑ Modifying On-Screen Labels❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement❑ Why Measure a Surface?❑ Surface Measurement Commands

❑ Inspect Surface❑ Surface Edge Point❑ Surface Point❑ Home In Point

❑ Important Topics - Surface MeasurementChapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding the CAD data❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Save the Measurements❑ Checking a Surface❑ Checking an Edge❑ Using Home In Points❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save Again

Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Scan Measurement Preference❑ Parallel Lock Planes❑ Show Surface Deviation❑ Rescale Whiskers❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report

Page 14: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement❑ Point Measurements

❑ Comp Off and Comp Axis❑ High Point and Low Point

❑ Surface Measurements❑ Important Topics - Point Measurement

Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical❑ PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement

❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Constructing the Alignment❑ High Points❑ Home-in Options❑ Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K❑ Three Coordinates, Select Surface❑ Three Coordinates, Sample Surface❑ Save the Home In File❑ Measure the Home In Points

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement❑ Sheet Metal Measurements

❑ Simple Features❑ Unique Sheet Metal Measurements❑ Surface Points

❑ CAD Side and Other Side❑ Dynamic Nominals

❑ Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture MeasurementChapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE❑ Constructing Nominals❑ Using the Measurement Template❑ Iterative Alignment❑ Compare to Straight Nominal Edge❑ Compare Nominal Circles❑ Compare Nominal Round Slots❑ Compare Nominal Surfaces

Chapter 25: Round Tubing❑ Tubing Part Preferences❑ Measure Tube

❑ Round Tube❑ Rectangular Tube❑ Tube Fitting

vi

Page 15: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

❑ Construct Tube❑ Enter XYZ❑ Enter PTB❑ From Features❑ Breakpoints❑ Importing Data

❑ Tube Reporting❑ Tube Correction Report

❑ Important Topics - Round TubingChapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Measuring a Tube❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report

Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Preparing the Learn Execute file❑ Start Programming❑ Constructing a Nominal Tube❑ Construct Tube Points❑ Measuring a Tube❑ Tube Alignment❑ Printing a Report❑ End Learn.

Chapter 28: Tool Building❑ Tool Building

❑ DRO Window❑ Dynamic DRO Window

❑ Important Topics - Tool BuildingChapter 29: Tool Building Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Aligning to the CAD❑ Iterative Alignment❑ Import Model❑ Creating a DRO window on a Nominal❑ Positioning the Bracket❑ Recording the Tool Position

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions❑ Geometric Characteristics and Symbols❑ Form Dimensions

vii

Page 16: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

❑ Orientation Dimensions❑ Parallelism❑ Perpendicularity❑ Concentricity

❑ True Position Dimensions❑ RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)❑ MMC (Maximum Material Condition)

❑ Important Topics - Advanced DimensionsChapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Constructing Nominals❑ Creating a Nominal Alignment❑ Measure the Datum Features❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment❑ Position Dimensions❑ Printing and Saving a Text Report❑ Save The Measurements

Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning❑ What is Scanning?❑ Why Scan?❑ Scanning Options

❑ Freehand Scan❑ Lock Planes❑ Editing Scan data

❑ Important Topics - Introduction to ScanningChapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Measuring and Creating an Alignment❑ CAD=Part❑ Save the Measurements❑ Scan Measurement Preference❑ Freehand Scanning (2D)❑ Parallel Lock Planes

Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation❑ Learn Mode

❑ On-Line Learn❑ Off-Line Learn

❑ Execute Mode❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Page 17: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding CAD❑ Start Learning❑ Measure Alignment/Datum Features❑ Creating an Alignment❑ Constructions and Dimensions❑ Generating a Report❑ End Learn.❑ Execute Mode

Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Translating and Adding CAD❑ Start Learning❑ Add Alignment/Datum Features❑ Adding an Alignment❑ Measuring Features❑ Adding Constructions and Dimensions❑ Generating a Report❑ End Learn❑ Execute Mode

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation❑ Learn Mode

❑ Online or Offline?❑ Execute Mode

❑ Display Results❑ Important Topics - Measurement Automation

Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Selecting Units and Default Tolerances❑ Start Programming❑ Constructing the Measured Alignment❑ Printing a Report❑ Modifying and Saving Your Learn file❑ Execute Mode

ix

Page 18: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

❑ SoftCheck Tools❑ Taking Pictures❑ Image Creator❑ The Green Ball

❑ 3D Effects❑ Independent Comments

❑ Hot Keys for Image Creator❑ Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures

Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

❑ Practical Exercise❑ Taking and Importing Images❑ Adding the Green/Red Balls❑ Creating Images, Icons and Reports❑ Saving the Image List❑ Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure❑ Execute the SoftCheck Tool

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager❑ Using the SoftCheck Tool Manager

❑ Navigating the SCTM❑ Main Screen❑ Tool List❑ Administrator

❑ Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool ManagerChapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE❑ Transferring SCTs to a New Computer❑ SoftCheck Tool Setup

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting❑ Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph

❑ Using Pictures from a Digital Camera❑ Chart Types

❑ Advanced Chart Options❑ Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting

x

Page 19: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical❑ Practical Exercise

❑ Modify the Learn/Execute Program❑ Creating Test Data for SPC Graph❑ Creating a SPC Graph Template❑ Align Icons❑ Adding a Preview to the Program

Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems❑ Feature Reducibility

❑ 3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems❑ Coordinate Systems❑ Change Coordinate System Discussion

❑ Important Topics - Intermediate AlignmentsChapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

❑ PRACTICAL Exercise❑ Measuring the Alignment Features❑ Setting an Iterative Alignment❑ 3-2-1❑ Separate Origin❑ Perpendicular Intersect❑ Bore❑ Line-Line❑ Midpoint❑ 3 Point❑ 3 Plane❑ Set Active Coordinate System❑ Change Coordinate System

❑ Rotation❑ Translation

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System❑ Calculated Coordinate System❑ CAD=Part❑ Constructions

❑ 2 Offset Line❑ 3 Offset Plane

❑ Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate SystemsChapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE❑ Nominal Alignments on the CAD❑ Construct the Plane❑ Construct the Plane

xi

Page 20: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 January 2008

❑ Construct the Line❑ Complete the Coordinate System❑ Verify Alignment

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments❑ Feature Alignment❑ Iterative Alignment with Surface Points❑ Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values

❑ When to Use This Technique❑ Watch Out!

❑ Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part AlignmentsChapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points

❑ Using Surfaces as Nominals❑ PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used Values

❑ Measurement Template❑ Using Surface Points

xii

Page 21: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

FARO Laser Tracker SafetyThe FARO Laser Tracker outputs a visible red laser beam. The source of the red light is a Helium Neon (HeNe) laser (Xi), or an instant-on pointer beam (X), which have an output of 1 milliwatt max/cw and are classified as a Class II laser. You should avoid direct exposure to your eye at all times even though the human blink reaction to bright light provides a natural mechanism of protection to this visible laser beam.

The FARO Laser Trackers also have an XtremeADM beam, which is an invisible infrared laser. The source of this beam is a distributed feedback (DFB) laser with less than 0.79 milliwatt output, and is classified as a Class I laser. This laser is harmless to your eye.

This equipment is classified as a Class II laser product and meets the requirements of the Food and Drug Administration, Center for Devices and Radiological Health, Register 21 CPR parts 1000 and 1040, and those of the international standard IEC EN 60825-1 2001-08.

The FARO Laser Tracker is certified to comply with the protection requirements of the Council Directives 89/336/EEC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) and 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive on Electrical Safety) on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility, as amended by 93/68/EEC.

CAUTION: USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.

The user must adhere to work safety laws as stated in UVV BGV B2, January 1993.

1Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 22: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker

Laser Radiation Emission

When operating, a laser beam is emitted from the aperture on the tracker. See Figure 1-1 for the location of the laser beam aperture.

Laser Aperture Labels

The aperture warning labels indicate where laser radiation emits from the tracker. See Figure 1-2 for the locations of these labels. They contain the words, “AVOID EXPOSURE, Visible and/or invisible laser radiation is emitted from this aperture.”

FIGURE 1-1 Laser Aperture

FIGURE 1-2 Laser Warning Labels on Aperture

LASERAPERTURE

AVOID EXPOSURE Visible and/or invisible laser radiation is emitted from this aperture

2 Facts

Page 23: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Laser Emission Indicator

The emission indicator on the front of the tracker illuminates when the laser is energized and operating. See Figure 1-3 for the location of the laser emission indicator.

Rear Composite Label

The composite label, located on the back of the tracker, combines the Working Logotype Label, the Certification Label and the Identification Label into one. See Figure 1-4, “Rear Composite Label.”

The top portion is the Working Logotype, which is required on all Class II laser products. It contains the wording:

LASER RADIATION, DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM.633-635 nm Laser, 1 milliwatt max/cw.CLASS II LASER PRODUCT.

Underneath the Working Logotype is the Certification. It contains the wording:

PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS UNDER THE FOOD, DRUG AND COSMETICS ACT AND INTERNATIONAL STANDARD IEC 60825-1 2001-08.

FIGURE 1-3 Laser Emission Indicator

OK

®

LASER TRACKER

LASER EMISSION INDICATOR

3Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 24: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker

The bottom portion of the rear composite label contains the Identification, which indicates the model number, the serial number, and the manufacturing date of your tracker.

Lifting the Tracker

A safety label is located on the rear of the tracker above the rear lifting handle. Follow safe lifting procedures when removing the tracker from its shipping containers. Always use safe lifting procedures when placing the tracker on, or removing the tracker from, the instrument stand. See Figure 1-5 for the location of the safety label.

Use the two handles on the front of the Tracker when removing it from the shipping container. Use the upper front and back handles when mounting and carrying the tracker.

FIGURE 1-4 Rear Composite Label

FIGURE 1-5 Lifting Label

CAUTION!LASER RADIATION

DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM

633-635 nm Laser1 milliwatt max/cw

CLASS II LASER PRODUCT

FARO Technologies, Inc. 125 Technology Park

Lake Mary, FL 32746 U.S.A.

Serial Number: L03000201023

Manufactured: Nov. 25, 2005

PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARDS UNDER: THE FOOD, DRUG, AND

COSMETICS ACT ANDINTERNATIONAL STANDARD IEC 60825-1 2001-08

InspectionSticker Here

CalibrationSticker Here

US and Worldwide Patents Pending

LISTING # E112555 COMPLIES WITH UL/CSA/IEC

61010-1TEST & MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT

WORKING LOGOTYPE

CERTIFICATION

IDENTIFICATION

4 Facts

Page 25: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Pinch Points

Located on both the frontsight and the backsight side of the tracker's center eyewheel, two labels indicate pinch points. Avoid placing hands and fingers in these locations. See Figure 1-6 for the location of the pinch point labels.

Hot Plugging

On the back of the tracker above the cable connection socket is the hot plugging caution label. See Figure 1-7 for the location of the hot plugging caution label.

The cable connects the Tracker to the Master Control Unit.

CAUTION: Do Not connect or disconnect this cable while power is applied to the Master Control Unit.

FIGURE 1-6 Pinch Point Labels

FIGURE 1-7 Hot Plugging Label

CAUTION Connect/disconnectcable only withPOWER OFF

5Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 26: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker

EMC Warning

Keep the Tracker and External Temperature Sensor cables separate from any other cables in the area in order reduce the likelihood of cross-coupled interference.

Two way RF hand held transmitters may generate interference into the system. Do Not use these devices near the Laser Tracker during measurements.

One-way RF transmitters, such as the RF Remote and Voice System sold by FARO Technologies, Inc., do not cause interference.

Care of the FARO Laser TrackerUse care in handling the FARO Laser Tracker system, especially while moving it from and one place to another. There are no user replaceable parts.

Optical Target Care

Optical Targets are an important part of the FARO Laser Tracker Systems. Handle them with great care to ensure their accuracy and longevity.

Target care includes:

• Never touching the optical surfaces of the target.

• Never dropping the target.

• Keeping the target free of dust and moisture by storing it in the case.

• Cleaning the target only when necessary.

If the Tracker does not lock onto the target, use the Operational Checks command to check your SMR. If the Return Power value is “GOOD” your SMR does not need cleaning.

CAUTION: Unnecessary cleaning will degrade the reflective surface of the SMR.

Cleaning the Optical Targets

In many cases, the optical surfaces of the target are simply dusty and just require cleaning with compressed air.

CAUTION: Do Not clean with compressed air available from a hose in a workshop - this is seldom clean and may coat the SMR with oil or some other contaminant.

6 Facts

Page 27: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Spray the air away from SMR for a few seconds before spraying it onto the optical surfaces.

NOTE: Always hold the can upright and never shake the can when spraying compressed air.

If the target is still not functional after blowing off any dust, use the following target specific procedures.

CAUTION: Never use a dry cotton swab or tissue to clean the optical surfaces because these will scratch the optical surfaces. Cleaning with any improper chemicals will destroy the reflective surface.

Standard SMRs and RetroProbes (Silver Coated)

1. Breathe on the optical surfaces.

2 Gently slide a cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction. Use one cotton swab for each pass and then discard it. You may need several swabs to clean the optical surfaces thoroughly.

3 If this does not successfully remove the residue, clean the optical surfaces with Optima Grade Acetone.

4 Moisten a clean cotton swab with Acetone.

5 Gently slide the cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction.

6 Remove any remaining cotton dust with canned compressed air.

Economy SMRs (Gold Coated)

1. Moisten a clean cotton swab with the Optima Grade Acetone.

2 Gently slide the cotton swab in one direction while rotating it in the opposite direction.

3 Remove any remaining cotton dust with canned compressed air.

Break Resistant SMRs (Gold Coated)

1. Moisten a clean soft tissue with the Optima Grade Acetone.

2 Gently place the moistened tissue on the optical surface and slowly pull it across.

3 Remove any remaining tissue lint with canned compressed air.

7Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 28: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker

Cleaning the Trackers Optics

The trackers aperture window and the embedded target covers may occasionally need cleaning.

• Remove any dust from the window using canned compressed air.

• If more cleaning is necessary, use water vapor and a clean cotton swab in the same manner as the SMRs (above). If water vapor does not successfully remove the residue, then use denatured alcohol.

Storage

When storing for long periods of time, pack the tracker in its shipping cases to protect it from environmental hazards, dust and dirt. Store the tracker in an environment where it will not be subject to extreme temperatures, environmental conditions, or heavy vibrations.

Transportation

When transporting the tracker around a shop floor, keep it mounted on a heavy-duty stand with wheels. Before moving the tracker, fully lower the tripods extension tube. Avoid any divots or large gaps in the floor. Do not slide the stand and tracker across the floor - lower the tripods wheels to raise the tripod off the floor.

When transporting the tracker long distances or between facilities, pack the tracker in its shipping cases. Always place the shipping cases on a pallet when using a forklift, and gently lift and lower the pallet.

Understanding Measurement AccuracyAs a general rule of the thumb, plan a measuring session to achieve accuracy equal to 10% of the smallest tolerance of the part. This is known as the “10 to 1” rule.

For example, if the smallest tolerance on your part is 1.0 mm, the measurement device should be accurate to at least 0.1 mm.

In order to determine the uncertainty associated with a particular measuring session, carefully estimate the contribution of errors from all identifiable sources. However, since the effects of some environmental factors are difficult to quantify, good metrology practice requires that the effects of all sources of error be minimized or eliminated. If the effects of environmental errors are left completely uncontrolled, the accuracy of the measurements may degrade to such an extent that the entire measuring session has to be rejected. Whenever

8 Facts

Page 29: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

possible, measure your part in a location where environmental factors are closely controlled and kept stable.

Effects of Atmospheric Conditions

As the temperature, barometric pressure, and relative humidity of air change, so does its index of refraction. A 1 part per million change in the index of refraction occurs for a 3 mmHg change in pressure, a 1°C in temperature, or a 40% change in relative humidity at 40°C. The index of refraction cannot be calculated correctly without the current atmospheric condition values. Your Tracker is equipped with weather sensors that measure the temperature, pressure and humidity of the air around the tracker every five seconds.

Thermal gradients, air turbulence, or air pockets of different temperatures in the path of the laser beam will affect the direction of the laser beam, and cause errors in the angular measurement taken by the Tracker. Avoid these errors, by not measuring near heating and air conditioning ducts, or any other source of these thermal effects.

Environmental Effects

Environment Effects such as excess vibration, mounting stability, and temperature can affect the accuracy of the measurements. Whenever possible, eliminate these outside factors.

Do not move heavy objects near the part before or during a measurement session. The magnitude of the effect depends largely on the weight of the object and the stability of the workshop floor foundations. In some cases, the floor may shift enough to disrupt measurement sessions for days after an object has been moved.

Support the part in the same manner for measurement as its intended function. This ensures that differential loading does not result in distortions in the part when it is put to use.

For high accuracy measurements, power up the Tracker in the environment before measuring and allow it to reach thermal stability in the local environmental conditions.

For high accuracy work, use redundant readings for each measurement. Taking redundant reading provides a means of detecting gross errors or blunders, may reduce the environmental effects that you have not been able to eliminate, and provides better statistical sampling. For example, measure a planar surface with more than three readings.

9Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 30: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 1: Laser Tracker

Targets

Regularly check the target nest and the SMR for metal filings or debris that prevent the target from seating in the nest.

Dimensional inaccuracies of target offsets are a frequent source of error during a measurement session. Check the Probe settings to select any additional tooling before measuring.

Physical Changes in the Part or Stand

Regularly inspect the Tracker stand and the Part to make sure that both remain stable throughout measuring. Any unknown change to the position of the Tracker stand and the Part degrades the measurement accuracy.

Radiant energy from the sun, hot lights, or space heaters during measurement can introduce non-uniform expansion in the measurement equipment or the part, and degrades the measurement accuracy. Whenever possible, shield the Tracker and the Part from external heat sources.

Backsight Readings

The Tracker reads the azimuth and zenith angles, and the distance to the target for each reading in a measurement. The readings are compensated using a kinematic model. The model has parameters for the laser's four degrees of freedom (two rotational and two translational), and two parameters for the gimbal (axis offset and axis non-squareness).

Verify the Tracker accuracy using the backsight checks. These checks compare a point reading taken in frontsight mode with one taken in backsight mode. The resulting deviation reports twice the worst-case error for a point measured at the range and position of the backsight reading. The error in a backsight reading is effectively error that is not compensated for by the kinematic model.

Although the kinematic model is highly effective in minimizing tracker measurement error, there are still many factors that are not accounted for by the model. Target quality, atmospheric induced errors, and thermal expansion are some of the errors that are not addressed by the model. Most of these errors are taken into account in formulating the specification for the tracker.

Measurement Strategy

Understanding how the Laser Tracker measures can play an important role in achieving high accuracy results. Tracker measurements are comprised of two angular and one distance measurements. The distance accuracy specifications are higher than the angular specifications. This means that if the features

10 Facts

Page 31: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

measured with the tracker are measured primarily in line with the path of the beam, and very little angular encoder movement the accuracy will be higher than features measured primarily with the angular encoders.

The example of a scale bar measurement can be used to illustrate this. If a scale bar is placed horizontally in front of the tracker, the distance between points at either end of the bar will be measured predominantly with the azimuth encoder. If the bar is placed in line with the laser beam, the distance will be measured primarily with the distance measurement. The accuracy achieved in the horizontal case will be within the specifications of the tracker system, however, the accuracy achieved in the in-line case will likely be much higher. In fact, a well aligned tracker can measure with interferometer accuracy when the angular measurements are minimized.

Setting up the tracker to minimize the angle in a measurement session is a good way to improve accuracy. This must be weighed against making the distance too great. When setting up to measure a rectangular part, the best position for the tracker would be a couple meters away from the end of the rectangle. If the rectangle is over 15 meters long, it may be better to move the tracker to the side of the rectangle, but still close to one end. Placing the tracker in the middle of the long side of the rectangle would result in an angular measurement volume of over 120 degrees compared with only a 30 degree volume from the end.

11Chapter 1: Laser Tracker Facts

Page 32: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 33: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 2: Hardware Overview• OBJECTIVE – The instructor will demonstrate all the

necessary cable connections and prepare the FARO Laser Tracker for measuring. After completing this exercise the student will know the proper mounting techniques for the Laser Tracker.

FARO Laser TrackerThe FARO Laser Tracker has a number of advantages over conventional metrology equipment. It offers high accuracy measurements over a volume, its compact and lightweight tracking head may be mounted either vertically or horizontally or even upside down. It is quick to set up and to relocate, and a single person may easily operate it. The exact equipment may differ from the equipment used in class today. However, these are a few common components for the Laser Control Station system.

❑ FARO Tracker measuring head.❑ Master Control Unit (MCU).❑ High Accuracy Level Sensor - Allows for leveling measurements to

gravity.❑ Remote Air Temperature Sensor.❑ Optical Targeting with Compensation Kit -Includes one 1.5”

Spherically Mounted Retroreflector (SMR), tripod, and tripod Adapter.

❑ Remote Control Unit - This wireless RF remote control unit may be used by the operator to control the FARO Tracker system.

❑ CAT5 cross wired 100MHz patch cable with RJ45 connectors.❑ FARO CAM2® Measure Software CD.❑ FARO LASER Tracker User Manual.❑ FARO CAM2® Measure Users Guide.❑ Quick Release Mandrel Mount - Allows for quick vertical

mounting to an instrument stand.❑ NIST traceable certification for the thermistor, pressure sensor and

humidistat.

The FARO Tracker head is shipped in a storage container by itself. The Master Control Unit, cables, SMR’s, tooling, and mounting hardware are shipped in a second storage container.

13Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Page 34: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 2: Hardware Ov

Setting up the FARO Laser TrackerThe FARO Laser Tracker is designed for mounting on an instrument stand in the vertical or positions (horizontal positions require the Tracker Side Mount Fixture). The tracker will operate in any orientation.

NOTE: The expanding mandrel mount is designed to hold the tracker in only the upright vertical position, or in the horizontal position when used in conjunction with the Tracker Side Mount Fixture (optional). When mounting the tracker upside down, it needs to be screwed directly into a mounting fixture.

To setup the Tracker follow these steps:

1 ❑ Place the instrument stand on a stable floor surface, away from obstructions.

2 ❑ Ensure that the instrument stand is resting on its adjusting pins.

3 ❑ Use the supplied spanner wrench to tighten the quick release mandrel to the instrument stand.

NOTE: It is not recommended that the tracker be placed on a stand that is tilted more than 10° from vertical.

4 ❑ Grasp the handles located on the front of the tracker and remove the FARO Tracker from the container.

NOTE: Never grasp the beam steering assembly of the FARO Tracker as this can cause damage.

5 ❑ Place the Tracker on the instrument stand by means of the mandrel mount inserted into the tracker base.

6 ❑ Turn the locking lever clockwise (when viewed from above) by hand until it is tight. The tracker is now locked in position.

7 ❑ Connect the air temperature sensor to the MCU.

8 ❑ Connect the communication cable to the socket on the back of the tracker and to the socket on the left side panel of the MCU.

9 ❑ Connect the computer to the MCU using the Ethernet cable.

10 ❑ Connect the power cord into the MCU and then connect to the power source.

NOTE: Making the connection in this order will ensure the machine is not damaged due to hot plugging the cable.

14erview

Page 35: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Apply power to the FARO Laser Tracker by turning on the switch at the right side of the MCU.

Smart Warm-up

Immediately after applying power to your tracker, your tracker will start performing a “Smart Warm-up”. During this time, the blue light on the front of the tracker will and the Azimuth and Zenith motors will be turned on. This process will continue until the tracker has reached the correct temperature, which is related to the ambient temperature.

NOTE: A tracker that has been stored in an air conditioned environment, and is brought out to a hot environment, will take longer to warm-up than a tracker that has been stored in the hot environment.

After the motors have raised the temperatures of the tracker, they will shut off and the tracker will spend minutes allowing the internal temperature to equilibrate. When the process has completed, the blue light on the front of the tracker will stop blinking and the tracker can be initialized using the Startup Checks.

While measurements can be taken immediately after initializing the tracker, it may take up to one hour for complete temperature equilibrium in a thermally stable environment. If measurements need to be taken immediately, you should check the Backsights, using CompIT, after the tracker has been on for one hour.

Powering Down

The following steps should be followed to power down the tracker:

1 ❑ Exit CAM2® Measure.

2 ❑ Store the SMR and/or any other targets in their protective cases.

3 ❑ Power down the tracker using the switch on the right side of the MCU and disconnect the power cable from outlet.

4 ❑ Disconnect the communication cable from the socket on the back of the tracker and from the socket on the side of the MCU.

5 ❑ Disconnect the air temperature sensor from teh MCU.

6 ❑ Disconnect the CAT5 100 MHz RJ-45 cable from the side of the MCU and the computer.

15Chapter 2: Hardware Overview

Page 36: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 2: Hardware Ov

7 ❑ Loosen the locking lever on the tracker mandrel and carefully remove the tracker head from the stand by grasping its handles, and store it in the tracker head container.

Important Topics - Hardware OverviewFARO Laser Tracker Specifications

Size

Tracker 280 x 554 mm (11 x 21 3/4 in.)

HeadMaster Control Unit 160 x 180 x 280 mm (6 x 7 x 11in.)

Weight

Tracker Head 20 - 22 kg (40 - 44 lbs.)

HeadMaster Control Unit 5 kg (12 lbs)

Environmental (Intended for Indoor Use Only)

Operating Temperature 4°C (40°F) to 43°C(110°F)

Altitude 1000 below Sea Levelto 2000 meters

Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing

Electrical

Master Control Unit 88~264 VAC 47~63 Hz, 575 VA max.

Fuses 250V

IEC 60127-2 5x20mm

US: 5A Slow-blow, EU: 2.5A Slow-blow

FIGURE 2-1 FARO Laser Tracker Specifications

16erview

Page 37: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

17Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical

Chapter 3: Hardware Overview Practical

Practical ExercisePractice the setup and packing of the FARO Laser Tracker/CAM2 Measure X system, or the FARO Control Station System.

Page 38: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 39: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

19Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

• Objective - The instructor will introduce the CAM2 Measure X user interface. After completing this section the students will be able to customize the system and hardware settings.

Using this manualThe practical sections of this manual include step by step instructions that instruct you in every step of the process. For example, when we want you to select a command, you will see the following text.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

You should use the mouse to select the command from the pull-down menu bar.

2 ❑ After selecting any command, you will see messages in the Output control bar at the bottom of the screen.

FIGURE 4-1 Selecting commands from the menu

Page 40: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

20Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Starting CAM2 Measure XSelect CAM2 Measure X from the Windows START button. If the tracker has not been initalized, CAM2 Measure X will perform StartUp Checks automatically.

Select the units: inches, or millimeters. This creates a new file on the screen.

NOTE: The units cannot be switched during the measurement session.

The default Part Preferences automatically load, these set the decimal places, tolerances, report formats, and other part related preferences. You can use CAM2 Measure X without a measuring device. This is often called using CAM2 Measure X off line.

Screen Layout

NOTE: This figure above shows the default setup, but you customize the screen layout by dragging the toolbars and control bars.

FIGURE 4-2 CAM2 Measure X Startup Checks

1 Graphics Field 2 Toolbar Buttons3 Digital Read Out (DRO) 4 Output Bar5 Pull Down menu 6 Status Bar7 Control Bars

FIGURE 4-3 Screen Layout

6

3

1

2

5

7

4

Page 41: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

21Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Graphics Field

The major portion of the CAM2 Measure X screen is consumed by the graphics field. This is the area that displays the measurements, and CAD data.

DRO Window

The Digital Readout (DRO) Window displays the current coordinate information from the measuring device. This window is located at the top of the CAM2 Measure X window. You can move and size the window with the mouse. Hide the window by pressing the D key on the computer keyboard. Press the D key again to display the DRO Window. These keyboard keys are referred to as in CAM2 Measure X. There are many more hot keys listed in the back of this section.

Pull-down Menus

On the top of the screen there is a pull-down menu bar. All the CAM2 Measure X commands can be accessed from the menu bar using the mouse.

FIGURE 4-4 Graphics Field

FIGURE 4-5 Digital ReadOut

FIGURE 4-6 Pull-down menu bar

Page 42: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

22Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Toolbar Buttons

Along the top of the screen are the toolbars. Toolbars consist of with pictures that represent the different commands. If the mouse is hovered over a button for a few seconds a tool tip appears describing the function of the tool bar button. A longer description also appears at the bottom of the screen in the Status Bar.

Output Control Bar

On the bottom of the screen is the Output Control Bar. Instruction for the appears here, so take a look at it often. The Output Control Bar appears automatically when new text is added by the program, and will collapse after a few seconds.

Status Bar

On the very bottom of the screen is the Status Bar. The description of the highlighted command appears on this bar, as well as the current units and the XYZ location of the cursor in the CAD coordinate system.

FIGURE 4-7 Toolbar Buttons

FIGURE 4-8 Output Control Bar

FIGURE 4-9 Status Bar

Page 43: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

23Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Control Bars

Along the left side of the screen are the three Control Bars. The Navigator, Saved Views, and CAD Parts bars provide quick access to some of the more commonly used commands.

CAM2 Measure X HELPCAM2 Measure X uses a standard Windows HTML Help file. You can search through the help file by utilizing contents, index, or a keyword by using each tab on the left side of the Help window. The CAM2 Measure XUser Manual is also available on the User Manual CD-ROM. You can view, search, and print the electronic file (*.pdf) using Adobe Acrobat Reader software.

About CAM2

About CAM2 Measure X displays the version, build number and FARO Customer Service contact information.

FIGURE 4-10 Control Bars

FIGURE 4-11 About CAM2

Page 44: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

24Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - ViewingKeys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

l Arrange Labels

WUXV Pan

a Device View

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen

S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

Page 45: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

25Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard.

Shortcuts - Viewing (with the mouse)

Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

Keys Command

S and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Zoom

Mouse Wheel Button Dynamic Zoom

C and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Pan

CS and drag the Right Mouse buttonDynamic Rotate

Page 46: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

26Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Hotkeys - CommandsKeys Command

É Help

G Cancel

Ê Measure a Comp Off Point

! Measure a Comp Axis Point

Ë Measure a Plane

Ì Measure a 2D Line

Ò Measure a Circle

Ó Measure a Cylinder

Ô Measure a Sphere

d Turns off the DRO (digital read out)

p Change SMR

t Reset Interferometer (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

n Set Distance Mode (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

s Search (FARO Laser Tracker Only)

x Switch between Single Point and Scan Mode

m Material Thickness (Sheet Metal commands only)

I Collect Reading

H Compensation Point

B Remove Reading

Page 47: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

27Chapter 4: Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

Important Topics - Introduction to CAM2 Measure X

• Use the toolbar buttons, or the pull-down menu bar to access commands.

• CAM2 Measure X runs both with or without a FaroArmTracker.

• CAM2 Measure X translates IGES, VDA, CATIA v4 and v5, Unigraphics, Parasolid, SolidWorks, Solid Edge and OpenNURBS file formats. For other CAD formats, use Rhino software to import your file and save as an OpenNURBS file.

• Never turn off the computer while CAM2 Measure X is running.

Page 48: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 49: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the procedure to perform adjustments to maintain the accuracy of the FARO Laser Tracker. After completing this section the student will be able to maintain the FARO Laser Tracker accuracy.

Operational Checks

Operational checks are performed to test the accuracy and of the tracker over the working volume. The Operational Checks determine the operating condition of the tracker as well as verify that environmental factors such as air movement and vibrations will not degrade measurement accuracy. They consist of a series of measurement procedures designed to verify Laser Tracker performance.

Compensations

The FARO Laser Tracker must be regularly and properly checked to ensure measurement. FARO CompIT will be used to compensate for the tracker’s deviations caused by shipping and other environmental factors.

Quick Backsight

The Quick Backsight Check is the first step in verifying the accuracy of the Tracker. The Quick Backsight Check determines if the tracker should be com-pensated to achieve higher accuracy. The Quick Backsights procedure allows

the operator to check backsight anywhere in the tracker’s measurement volume. This makes it possible to check the error during the course of any inspection without having to move or rotate the tracker. Quick Backsights should be performed once per day prior to the measurement ses-sion, and during the measurement session as desired.

Self Comp

FARO CompIT will be used to compensate for the tracker’s deviations caused by shipping and other environmental factors. The Quick Backsight Check is the first step in verifying the accuracy of the Tracker. If the results of the Quick Backsight Check show that the Tracker requires compensation, the Self Comp routine should be run.

29Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Page 50: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 5: Laser Checks

FARO Self Comp is the primary method used for compensating the FARO Tracker. The Self Comp procedure requires no operator input, it will run automatically.

If further adjustment is required, the other FARO CompIT procedures have been designed so that the operator can follow the on screen prompts during the compensation procedures.

Pointing Compensation

This compensation procedure determines and for backsight errors and error in the angular encoders. The pointing test consists of two procedures.

Interim Test (IT) - The IT prompts the user to take measurements at predetermined locations to calculate the backsight error. Upon completion of this test, the results will be displayed with either a Pass or Fail situation.

Pointing Compensation - If a tracker fails the IT, the pointing compensation needs to be performed to compensate the tracker for backsight error. The procedure is performed in the same was as the IT test, but with more points.

ADM

If the Tracker is equipped with ADM capability, it is recommended that this test is done weekly. The test procedure will vary depending on the model tracker.

Interim Test (IT) - For the Xi model the IT directs the operator to move the SMR to predetermined locations to compare the distance measurement of the Inferometer and ADM laser. Upon completion of this test, the results will be displayed with either a Pass or Fail situation.

For the X model, the test compares the distance between two points from different tracker locations. A scale bar can also be used for this test if the tracker cannot be moved.

30 and Compensation

Page 51: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Operational Checks

Operational checks are performed to test the of the tracker over the working volume. The Operational Checks determine the operating condition of the tracker as well as verifying that environmental factors such as air movement and vibrations will not degrade measurement accuracy. They consist of a series of measurement procedures designed to verify Laser Tracker performance.

When to Perform

Operational Checks should be performed after the tracker has been moved to a new operating environment to ensure that the environment and setup will not affect the measurement accuracy.

NOTE: If the Laser Tracker is consistently used in the same stable environment, Operational Checks do not need to be run on a regular basis. As a comfort factor, they can be performed occasionally to verify that the environment hasn’t changed.

General Page

This page monitors the ambient conditions from the MCU and external temperature sensors. It also checks the Return Power - the strength of the laser signal as the beam travels from the laser source to the SMR and back. This value will be low if the SMR is dirty and needs to be cleaned.

Repeatability Page

This page is used to check the of the measurement system.

Closure - Tests the interferometer’s ability to repeat the distance to a known point. Failure to repeat may indicate a damaged SMR or a tracker that isn’t functioning properly.

Static Repeatability - Measures the ability of the tracker to obtain the same measurement value for a given point. Failure to repeat may indicate instability of the tracker or the part.

Dynamic Repeatability - Measures the ability of the tracker to obtain the same measurement value for a given point while moving the SMR throughout the measurement volume. Failure to repeat may indicate instability of the reference point, tracker, or instrument stand.

31Chapter 5: Laser Checks and Compensation

Page 52: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 5: Laser Checks

Important Topics - Laser Checks and Compensation

• CompIT allows the operator to optimize the laser tracker to perform accurate measurements.

• ADM Interim test will run differently on the different model trackers.

• Self Comp is the primary method for compensating the tracker. It requires no input from the operator.

32 and Compensation

Page 53: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Practical ExerciseThis exercise will perform the most common Compensation checks to optimize the measurement performance of the tracker. Operational Checks will be used to verify the tracker in a stable environment.

There are indicator lights on each side of the Tracker’s aperture. A solid green light indicates that the tracker knows the distance between the tracker and the SMR. The red light will come on when the tracker is acquiring data.

When the green light is blinking, the radial distance is not known. In ADM measurement mode, acquire the beam with the target by holding the SMR in the beam path for the Tracker to reacquire the distance. In Interferometer measurement mode, the Tracker must be sent to a reset location such as the Home (TMR - Tracker Mounted Reset) position on the tracker head.

Compensations

The FARO CompIT software is used to fine tune the tracker parameters that change during normal use and operation of the tracker.

NOTE: FARO CompIT assumes that a 1.5” SMR is being used for all compensation routines described here. If the beam is broken during this process the Auto-Home feature will send the tracker back to look for the SMR in its home position and the test is re-started from the first point.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select HARDWARE CONFIG.

2 ❑ From the HARDWARE CONFIG dialog, select COMPIT.

FIGURE 6-1 FARO CompIt

33Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 54: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker

Quick Backsights

1 ❑ From the COMPIT program, click the BACKSIGHTS button.

2 ❑ Asterisks in the Desired column indicate that the user may move the SMR and tracker to any desired location.

3 ❑ Position an SMR Nest on a stable surface or on the object being measured. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used.

4 ❑ Remove the SMR from the TMR (Tracker Mounted Reset or Home position) and track to the reference point.

5 ❑ Click the MEASURE button.

The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement.

6 ❑ Once the target is stable, the Tracker will measure the point in frontsight and backsight.

NOTE: If the SMR does not stabilize within 60 seconds an error will appear. If this happens, check the stability of the SMR and the tracker and try again

7 ❑ The difference between the two measurements is calculated and displayed as Backsight Error.

When the backsight measurements are completed at this location FARO CompIT will prompt the user to move the SMR to another location.

8 ❑ Track the SMR to a second location.

9 ❑ Click the MEASURE button.

10 ❑ Track the SMR to a third location.

FIGURE 6-2 Backsights

34 Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 55: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Click the MEASURE button.

12 ❑ Click the CONTINUE button.

13 ❑ Quick Backsight Check Results will be displayed.

The results of the Interim Test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided.

NOTE: If desired, select Details to view the results of the Interim Test and select Report to save the results to a text file.

14 ❑ Click the DONE/CANCEL button to exit.

NOTE: If a Pass condition is obtained, select Done to exit the test, or to proceed with the Pointing test select the More button. If a Fail condition is obtained, cancel and run Self Comp.

Self Comp

1 ❑ From the COMPIT program, click the SELFCOMP button.

2 ❑ The FARO tracker will compensate for backsight error. No user input is required.

Pointing

Pointing CompIT is divided into two parts: the Interim Test and the Pointing Compensation.

Interim test

The interim test will determine if the Pointing Compensation is needed.

FIGURE 6-3 Self Comp Results

35Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 56: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker

1 ❑ From the FARO COMPIT program, select POINTING.

2 ❑ The operator must move the SMR to the location indicated by the DESIRED column.

3 ❑ Place the SMR in the calibration tripod or in another stable nest at this location.

NOTE: Move the SMR and/or rotate the tracker until the numbers for all three values appear green.

4 ❑ The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement.

5 ❑ Once the target is stable the Tracker will measure the point in both frontsight and backsight.

6 ❑ When the backsight measurements are completed at this location FARO CompIT will prompt to move the SMR to the next location

7 ❑ Repeat steps 2 to 6 for the next 2 locations.

NOTE: After the prescribed locations are finished, FARO CompIT allows the user to measure backsight error at optional user-defined locations.

8 ❑ Click the CONTINUE button after all locations have been measured.

9 ❑ The results of the Interim Test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided.

10 ❑ If a PASS condition is obtained, click the DONE button to exit the test, or proceed to the Pointing test by selecting the CONTINUE button.

11 ❑ If a FAIL condition is obtained, click the CONTINUE button to proceed with the Pointing Compensation.

FIGURE 6-4 Pointing

36 Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 57: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Pointing Compensation

12 ❑ Repeat steps 2 to 6 as instructed.

13 ❑ The results of the Pointing Compensation are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided.

14 ❑ Click the DETAILS button to review the results of the test.

15 ❑ Click the CLOSE button to exit the DETAILS dialogue.

16 ❑ If the results read PASS, click the UPDATE button to apply the compensation parameters and exit the Pointing CompIT.

17 ❑ If the results read FAIL, click the CANCEL button and repeat the test.

NOTE: If the Pass criteria are not met after repeating the test contact FARO Customer Service for further instructions.

ADM

There are two different ADM Interim Tests for the two different Laser Tracker models. The Interim Test for the Xi model compares ADM measurements to IFM measurements. For the X model the Interim Test compares two distance measurements between two points. The Interim Test for the Xi model is shown below.

Interim test

Use the ADM Interim Test to verify the accuracy of the ADM. It should be run at least once a week.

1 ❑ From the FARO COMPIT program, select ADM.

FIGURE 6-5 ADM Interim Test

37Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 58: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker

2 ❑ Desired column indicates that the target should be at the specified distance away but in any angle.

3 ❑ Place the SMR in the calibration tripod or in another stable nest at this location.

NOTE: Move the move SMR and/or rotate the tracker until the distance values appear green.

4 ❑ The tracker will wait for stability of the SMR before taking a measurement.

5 ❑ Once the target is stable the tracker will measure the point automatically.

6 ❑ When completed at this location, FARO CompIT will prompt to move the SMR to a second location.

7 ❑ Once it has taken the second point the results of the ADM test are shown as either Pass or Fail and a recommendation is provided.

8 ❑ If the results read FAIL, click the CANCEL button and repeat the test.

NOTE: If the PASS criteria are not met after repeating the test contact FARO for further instructions.

Operational Checks

General Page

To access the operational checks:

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select LASER TRACKER > OPERATIONAL CHECK.

2 ❑ The OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialogue box will appear.

3 ❑ Select the GENERAL PAGE tab (it should be displayed by default).

FIGURE 6-6 Operational Checks

38 Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 59: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Place the SMR at the home position.

5 ❑ Click the HOME button.

6 ❑ Check that the SMR Return Power is GREEN.

NOTE: The Return Power is a percentage of laser power currently being received by the tracker from the SMR compared to the maximum power, which is established at the factory. Typically a dirty SMR or Tracker lens is the cause of a low Return Power signal. The Target Return Intensity will be displayed in red if the return power becomes to low.

7 ❑ Check the temperature, pressure, and humidity of the tracker’s measuring environment.

• Temperature = 4°C (40°F) to 43°C (110°F).

• Humidity = 0% to 95% (non-condensing).

NOTE: A lightning bolt next to a reading indicates that the measurement originates from the tracker’s internal sensors, while a pencil indicates that the measurement was manually configured.

Repeatability Checks

Repeatability checks are performed to test the interferometer and encoders consistency during measurement.

Closure (Interferometer Repeatability)

The Closure check ensures that the interferometer is counting the distance properly as the SMR is tracked throughout the measurement volume. The mounting of the tracker, stability of the target and environment will effect repeatability of the measurements.

1 ❑ From the OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialog, select the REPEATIBILITY tab.

39Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 60: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker

2 ❑ From the OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialog, click on the CLOSURE button in the TESTS section.

NOTE: The Position Monitor section displays the real time position of the target in spherical coordinates: Azimuth angle (Az), Zenith angle (Ze), and Radial distance (D). dT value displays the last measurement result.

3 ❑ Place the SMR at the home position.

4 ❑ Click the HOME button.

5 ❑ Click the START TEST button.

6 ❑ Remove the SMR from the TMR and track it around the measurement volume.

7 ❑ Return the SMR to the TMR.

8 ❑ Click the MEASURE button to record the repeatability.

9 ❑ Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window).

• Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in)

10 ❑ Repeat steps 5 and 6 two (2) more times making sure that the above criteria are maintained.

11 ❑ Click the STOP TEST button when completed.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 10 are not met, repeat the CLOSURE test. If the result is the same contact FARO for further instructions. OPERATIONAL CHECKS dialogue box will appear.

Static Repeatability

The static repeatability check determines whether the tracker can repeat the measured position of a point.

FIGURE 6-7 Operational Checks - Repeatability

40 Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 61: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

1 ❑ Place the SMR in the TMR.

2 ❑ Click the HOME button to reset the distance.

3 ❑ Position an SMR Nest approximately 3 meters from the tracker. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used

4 ❑ Remove the SMR from the TMR and track to the reference point.

NOTE: The SMR remains at the reference point and is not moved at all during the test.

5 ❑ Click the STATIC button in the TESTS section.

6 ❑ Click the START TEST button.

7 ❑ Enter the desired time delay between observations. The default value of two seconds is recommended.

8 ❑ Click the OK button.

The tracker will begin by measuring a reference point, and then it will measure successive points to test repeatability.

9 ❑ Allow the tracker to collect 10 measurements. Watch the Measurement Indicator light on the tracker blink 10 times.

10 ❑ Click the STOP TEST button.

11 ❑ Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window).

• Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in)

FIGURE 6-8 Static Repeatability Test

FIGURE 6-9 Time Delay

41Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 62: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 6: Laser Tracker

12 ❑ Repeat this test at two other locations.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 10 is not met for the first location, track the SMR back to the TMR and check the stability of the tracker, stand, and tripod/reference nest being used and repeat the test from the beginning. If the criteria are not met, contact FARO for further instructions.

Dynamic Repeatability

This check determines whether the tracker can repeat the measured position of a point after moving the SMR throughout the measurement envelope. It is similar to the Static test except that the SMR will be moved between measurements.

1 ❑ Place the SMR in the TMR.

2 ❑ Click the HOME button to reset the distance.

3 ❑ Click on the Dynamic button in the Tests section.

4 ❑ Position an SMR Nest on a stable surface or on the object being measured. The calibration tripod supplied with the tracker may be used

5 ❑ Remove the SMR from the TMR and track to the reference point.

6 ❑ Click the DYNAMIC button.

7 ❑ Click the START TEST button.

8 ❑ After the tracker has measured a reference point, track the SMR around the measurement envelope.

9 ❑ Return the SMR to the Reference nest.

10 ❑ Click the MEASURE button.

11 ❑ Click the STOP TEST button to review the results.

FIGURE 6-10 Dynamic Repeatability Test

42 Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 63: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

12 ❑ Check that the TOTAL value in the TEST RESULTS section is in the following range (scroll to view the Total column, or maximize the Operational Checks window).

• Total = -0.025 mm to 0.025 mm (-0.001 in to 0.001 in)

13 ❑ Repeat this test at two other locations.

NOTE: If the criteria in Step 12 is not met for the first location, track the SMR back to the TMR and check the stability of the tracker, stand, and tripod/reference nest. Repeat the Dynamic Repeatability test. If the criteria are not met, contact FARO for further instructions.

14 ❑ Click the SAVE AS button to save test results.

15 ❑ Click the CLOSE button to exit Operational Checks.

After the above checks have passed the tracker will be ready for use.

• File name = Training Repeatibillity.csv.

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 6-11 Save As dialog

43Chapter 6: Laser Tracker Checks and Compensations Practical

Page 64: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 65: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

45Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Chapter 7: Feature Measurement• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate proper

measurement and compensation techniques. After completion of this section the student will learn to measure geometric features properly. They will also be able to differentiate the differences between measured, constructed and nominal features.

Types of Features

There are two basic types of features in CAM2 Measure X, require a plane of projection, and do not.

Page 66: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

46Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

2D Features

A 2D feature requires a plane of projection. When selecting a 2D feature from the measurement menu, the dialog box will appear. You will always need to select the plane to which the points will be projected. A good way to tell if a feature is 2D is the appearance of the dialog box.

FIGURE 7-1 Select Plane

1. Rectangular Slot 2. Circles

3. Round Slot 4. Ellipse

5. 2D LineFIGURE 7-2 2D Features

5

12

3

4

Page 67: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

47Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

3D Features

A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection. 3D features also have some “depth,” and are displayed as within CAM2 Measure X.

1. Cone 2. Sphere

3. CylindersFIGURE 7-3 3D Features

1

2

3

Page 68: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

48Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

CompensationAfter the FaroArmLaser Tracker has been compensated you are ready to start measuring. When measuring with a SMR, a point is taken in the center of the SMR each time the INSERT key is pressed. The point actually needs to be projected the radius of the SMR in order for the measurement to be taken in the correct location. The distance between the point of contact and the center of the SMR is known as SMR Offset. This transfer of the point from the center of the SMR to the correct location is known as SMR compensation.

NOTE: The location of the SMR is extremely important when FaroArmthe HOME key is pressed.

1. SMR 2. Center of the SMR

3. SMR OffsetFIGURE 7-4 SMR Offset

3

1

2

Page 69: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

49Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

To better explain this subject here are a few examples.

Plane Compensation

A plane is defined using the center of the SMR for each point taken with the INSERT key as shown below.

FIGURE 7-5 Plane Measurement

FIGURE 7-6 Pre-Plane

Page 70: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

50Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

This plane can then be compensated in one of two directions. The correct compensation depends on where the HOME key is pressed. In this situation the HOME key is to be pressed above the plane. The plane will then be compensated down the distance equal to the SMR radius.

FIGURE 7-7 SMR Compensation

Page 71: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

51Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Compensation of a 2D Feature

When measuring a 2D feature the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears. Each point of the 2D feature is automatically projected to that selected plane. Compensation for the SMR diameter will be performed when measuring 2D features. When measuring a hole, the hole will be measured as a circle projected to a selected plane. The compensation point is taken by pressing the HOME key inside the hole for an inner diameter, outside the post for an outer diameter. This inner diameter concept is demonstrated below.

Measure at least three points inside the hole.

Each time the INSERT key is pressed that point is automatically projected to the selected plane.

FIGURE 7-8 Circle Measurement

FIGURE 7-9 Plane Projection

Page 72: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

52Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

A circle is defined.

By compensating in the center of the hole the circle is offset the distance equal to the radius of the SMR. This results in the correct diameter.

FIGURE 7-10 Pre-Compensated Circle

FIGURE 7-11 Circle Compensation

Page 73: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

53Chapter 7: Feature Measurement

Review FeaturesReview Features allows the operator to see every feature that has been measured or constructed in a particular measurement session. All data is displayed in the current alignment.

Printing

From Review Features a graphical text report can be printed to a printer, saved to a file, or e-mailed.

Erasing

Delete extra or un-needed features with the DELETE icon, or with the

ERASE button in the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Feature Measurement• A 2D feature requires a plane of projection.

• A 3D feature does not require a plane of projection.

• The INSERT key is used to take measured points. The HOME key is used to compensate for the radius of the SMR.

Page 74: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 75: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

55Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Practical ExercisesExecute Mode

EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run pre-programmed measurement routines. To help get accustomed to the FaroArm, measure several of the pre-programmed measurements.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select 10REF089_XLN Basic Measurements.

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 8-1 Choose File type

FIGURE 8-2 Select the Basic Measurements Program

Page 76: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

56Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

6 ❑ Wait a few seconds while the CAD file loads.

7 ❑ Read each COMMENT box.

8 ❑ Click the OK button to clear the comments box.

9 ❑ Follow the glowing targets to measure the points using the INSERT key on the keyboard.

10 ❑ Once all the points for a feature are measured, a trickle down tone will be played by the computer. Press FaroArmthe HOME key on the keyboard.

REMEMBER: The location of where theHOME key is pressed determines the direction of the SMR compensation.

11 ❑ Measure all the features in the program in the same manner.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

The measurement routine is automatically performing alignments, constructions, and dimensions. These commands will be discussed in detail in the following chapters.

12 ❑ After the last measurement, the program will prompt the operator to measure another part, press YES.

FIGURE 8-3 Comment box

FIGURE 8-4 Repeat the Program?

Page 77: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

57Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

View Control

Run the program again.

Try the following view commands:

Hot Keys - Viewing

Keys Command

i Zooms In

o Zooms Out

e Reset the View, or Zoom All

WUXV Pan

a Device View

^ Top View

% Side View

$ Front View

) Isometric View

C+t Center View

S+A+E Full Screen

S++ Increase Whisker Scale

- Decrease Whisker Scale

Page 78: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

58Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Hot Keys - Viewing (on numeric keypad)

NOTE: On most Laptop computers there is a L key which switches a section of the keyboard to function as the numeric keypad from a full size keyboard.

At the end of the program, when prompted to measure another part, press theHOME key for NO. The graphics screen now contains all of the features that have just been measured and all of the nominal features from the program.

Keys Command

+ Zooms In

- Zooms Out

8462 Pan

7 Rotate around X Counterclockwise

9 Rotate around X Clockwise

1 Rotate around Y Counterclockwise

3 Rotate around Y Clockwise

0 Rotate around Z Counterclockwise

. Rotate around Z Clockwise

Page 79: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

59Chapter 8: Feature Measurement Practical

Review Features

To view the measurement data, use the Review Features command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Take a look at the features by selecting them in the FEATURE LIST.

NOTE: Measurements have the M_ prefix. Constructions have the C_ prefix. Nominals have the N_ prefix.

FIGURE 8-5 Review Features

Page 80: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 81: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

61Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will introduce coordinate systems and alignments. After completion of this section, the student will understand the concepts of plane (3), line (2), and point (1) reducibility. The student will gain an understanding of how and why coordinate systems are used.

Coordinate SystemsWhat is a Coordinate System?

Coordinate systems are XYZ reference frames built from measured features. Start by measuring the features that will be used to construct a coordinate system. These are sometimes called features.

CAM2 Measure X offers many ways to establish coordinate systems, in this section two of the most common coordinate systems: the 3-2-1 and the Line-Line will be presented. CAM2 Measure X also allows the operator to set up different coordinate systems and switch between them. New coordinate systems can be created from existing coordinate systems.

Page 82: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

62Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Two coordinate systems that are used in this class:

1 The XYZ coordinate system of the measurement device and of the nominal features are known as the World Coordinate System or WCS (1).

2 The XYZ coordinates that are constructed from a coordinate system on the part are known as the Users Coordinate System or UCS (2).

AlignmentsWhat is an Alignment?

The term alignment comes from the traditional (Coordinate

Measuring Machine), to indicate that the part needs to be to the coordinate system of the machine.

In CAM2 Measure X, the coordinate system of the measured features is aligned with the coordinate system of nominal features. This allows you to compare the measured part to the design data. The process is also known as CAD to Part alignment.

An alignment should be as soon as possible.

FIGURE 9-1 Coordinate System

2

1

Page 83: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

63Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Feature ReducibilityFeature Reducibility is a term used to describe that one type of feature can be used like another type for alignments, constructions and dimensions.

For example, a circle is , that means it can be used like a point for alignments, constructions, or dimmensions.

A Circle is also Line reducible and Plane reducible.

FIGURE 9-2 Point Reducability

FIGURE 9-3 Line and Plane Reducability

Page 84: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

64Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Feature Reducibility Exercise

Complete the following feature reducibility table:

Plane Line Point

Arc

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

Ellipse

Line

Plane

Point

Page 85: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

65Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Rectan-gular Slot

Round Slot

Sphere

Plane Line Point

Page 86: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

66Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

ConstructionsWhat is a Construction?

A construction allows you to create features that cannot be measured directly. Sometimes points or other features are specified on a drawing but do not actually exist on the part. For example, the intersection of two lines where the corner has a fillet or radius.

Common Constructions

The following is a list of some of the more common constructions used in basic measurement:

1 Point:• Line/Line: Intersection of two lines.

• Line/Feature: Intersection of line and another feature. (Such as plane or sphere)

FIGURE 9-4 Intersection Point

Page 87: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

67Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

2 Circle:• Best-fit: Bolt circle diameters.

3 Plane:• Parallel: Constructs a plane at a known distance from another plane.

• Bisector: Constructs a plane between two planes.

There are many constructions available. Review the constructions to evaluate which commands can be applied to a measurement task.

FIGURE 9-5 Bolt Hole Circle

Page 88: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

68Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

DimensionsWhat is a Dimension?

A dimension describes the relationship between two or more features. There are several types of dimensions available in CAM2 Measure X:

1 Length: Displays the 3D distance between two features as well as the change in X, Y and Z.

FIGURE 9-6 Point to Point distance

FIGURE 9-7 Point to Line distance

Page 89: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

69Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

FIGURE 9-8 Point to Plane distance

Page 90: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

70Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

2 Angle: Displays the angle between two (or three) features.

3 Orientation: These are geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) features that display a length result. CAM2 Measure X has a separate pull-down menu for a variety of GD&T dimensions.

FIGURE 9-9 Angle Line to Line

Page 91: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

71Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Tricky Dimensions

Most CAM2 Measure X dimensions are fairly straight forward, but there are few that are confusing:

Dimension > Length > Line to Line, or Dimension > Length > Plane to Plane:

This gives the minimum distance between two features. The length is measured from the center point of one feature to the perpendicular distance of the other feature. Selecting the features in the opposite order will generate a different result.

A measured or constructed point on one of the features and the Dimension > Length > Point to Line, or Dimension > Length > Point to Plane command provides the best solution.

FIGURE 9-10 Dimension Line/Line or Plane/Plane

Page 92: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

72Chapter 9: Basic Part Measurements

Important Topics - Basic Part Measurement• All coordinate systems behave in the same manner. Each coordinate

system requires a plane, a line, and a point.

• Feature reducibility is a term used to describe a feature for coordinate systems, constructions, and dimensions.

• A best fit circle is constructed using at least three point reducible features.

Page 93: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

73Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Practical ExerciseUsing the base plate of the demo part, complete a typical measurement session. In the first exercise, the EXECUTE command was used. This exercise will allow you to be more independent and select the commands from the pull-down menu bar

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin respectively.

Setting the Alignment

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

As default, CAM2 Measure X automatically loads millimeters as the units, ± 1.27 as the tolerances, and a DRO display of 4 numbers after the decimal. It is very likely that your part will not use these values. However, CAM2 Measure X has the ability to modify, save and load part preferences.

FIGURE 10-1 FARO Demonstration Part

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 94: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

74Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to±0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure.

6 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 10-3 Load Tolerances

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-4 Probes

Page 95: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

75Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

8 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: The number of digits for the label (001) is determined by the Application Preference, Miscellaneous, Number of Digits for Label. The default value is three.

NOTE: The decimal place values are determined by the Part Preference, Display Decimal Places. The default value is four places to the left, three to the right.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-5 Measure XY Plane

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the plane.

• The NORMAL IJK values describe the direction of the plane.

• RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.

• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the plane.

FIGURE 10-6 Plane Results

Page 96: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

76Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

10 ❑ After accepting a plane, press the HOME key or the ESC key to cancel the plane measurement command.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure always continues to measure additional features until receiving a command to stop. Stop, or Cancel, the command by pressing the HOME key or by pressing the ESC key.

11 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

12 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

13 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-7 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-8 Select Plane

Page 97: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

77Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

14 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-9 Measure X Axis

• The POINT XYZ values describe the first point on the line.

• The AXIS IJK values describe the direction of the line.

• RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit.

• STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit.

• MAX and MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 10-10 Line Results

Page 98: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

78Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

16 ❑ Continue with the Measure 2D Line command.

NOTE: The Part Preference for Auto Plane Selection is set to LAST (default). This will place all 2D features on the last plane selected in the SELECT PLANE dialog.

17 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Measure the line nearest Slot F. Measure in the direction from Sphere A towards Sphere C.

FIGURE 10-11 Measure Y Intercept

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 10-12 Line Results

Page 99: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

79Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

18 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

NOTE: The Z Rotation IJK is the vector of the previous Z Axis relative to the new Z Axis. The Translation XYZ values shows where the coordinate system has moved. The Z Angle Rotation is the angle between the previous Z Axis and the new Z Axis. RMS is the Root Mean Square value of the fit. STAND DEV is the Standard Deviation of the fit. MAX AND MIN describe the measured point above and below the fit. FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

20 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART (This step will be discussed in the next chapter).

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-13 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

S

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-14 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 100: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

80Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

Feature Measurements

Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1. See “FARO Demonstration Part” on page 73.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

FIGURE 10-15 Base Plate Alignment

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-16 Select Plane

Page 101: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

81Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

3 ❑ Measure the holes in the circular pattern starting with the hole that is labeled 1.

NOTE: In the RESULTS dialog box, the View Style changes from Simple to Tabular. After any alignment command, the View Style automatically changes to the Tabular style.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-17 Measure Circle 1

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle.

• The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the circle.

FIGURE 10-18 Circle Results

Page 102: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

82Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

5 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure circles until the command is canceled.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each circle measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

• Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 10-19 Measure Circles 2 through 8

FIGURE 10-20 Measured Circles 1 through 8

Page 103: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

83Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Constructions

Determine the diameter of the bolt circle pattern of the eight holes.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < BEST FIT.

2 ❑ Take a look a the results.

NOTE: Was the circle accepted before changing the label? You can change the feature label later using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001 through M_CIRCLE008.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-21 Construct Circle Best Fit

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE. This is the new name for this feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-22 Changing a Feature Label

Page 104: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

84Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Changing Labels from Review Features

NOTE: If the feature label was not changed in the RESULTS dialog, use the following steps to correct the feature label.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Double left mouse click on the bolt circle from the list of features.

• Select a Feature = C_CIRCLE001.

NOTE: The first object created in the file will be at the bottom of the list, the most recent feature at the top of the list.

3 ❑ Change the label. Type BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Select a Feature = BOLT_CIRCLE.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

FIGURE 10-23 Review Features

Page 105: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

85Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Dimensions

To establish some dimensions measure a couple more features.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

3 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 10-24 Probes

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-25 Measure Sphere A

Page 106: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

86Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ CAM2 Measure X always continues to measure spheres until the command is canceled. Continue measuring Sphere D.

• The CENTER XYZ values describe the location of the center of the circle.

• The DIAMETER value describes the Diameter of the circle.

• FORM is the sum of MAX and MIN.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 10-26 Sphere Results

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-27 Measure Sphere D

Page 107: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

87Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select LENGTH < POINT/POINT.

NOTE: Choose features from the drop-down list box, or use the FROM SCREEN button to pick it from the screen. In CAM2 Measure X dialog

boxes, all feature drop-down list boxes have a FROM SCREEN button so you can choose the feature from the CAD screen instead of the list box.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 10-28 Sphere Results

• Select 1st Point = M_SPHERE001.

• Select 2nd Point = M_SPHERE002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-29 Dimension Length Point/Point

• The DELTA XYZ values describe the distance between the two center points along each axis.

• The LENGTH value describes the straight distance between the two center points.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 10-30 Dimension Results

Page 108: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

88Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

9 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE < APEX.

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-31 Dimension Angle Apex

• The ANGLE value is the angle between the three points.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 10-32 Angle Results

Page 109: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

89Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

View the results of the features using the REVIEW FEATURES command.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

FIGURE 10-33 Review Features

• Operator’s name = your name.

• Name of the part = Basic Measurements.

• Serial number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-34 Enter Header Information

Page 110: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

90Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Simple.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-35 Report List

FIGURE 10-36 Report Preview

• File name = Basic Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 10-37 Save As

Page 111: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

91Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X saves files in the CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce) format.

Additional Coordinate Systems

If for some reason the alignment is not correct, or a different coordinate system is required, CAM2 Measure X is able to set up additional coordinate systems. For this exercise use the top surface of the plate, two spheres to define a line, and the center point of the bolt circle.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

• File name = Basic Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 10-38 Save As

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 10-39 Measure Sphere B

Page 112: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

92Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

NOTE: Notice that the base plane can define something other than +XY, and the line can define something other than +X in the 3-2-1 coordinate system.

NOTE: This creates a new coordinate system to view the data. The X axis is perpendicular to M_PLANE001. The Y axis is parallel to a line between M_SPHERE001 and M_SPHERE003. The origin is located at the center of the bolt circle, C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then remeasure the sphere.

FIGURE 10-40 Sphere Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +YZ.

• Select the radio button next to FIRST POINT ON AXIS.

• First Point on Axis = M_SPHERE001.

• Second Point on Axis = M_SPHERE003.

• Direction of Axis = +Y.

• Select Origin = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-41 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 113: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

93Chapter 10: Basic Part Measurements Practical

Switching between coordinate systems.

The blue coordinate system icon shows the active coordinate system. The green coordinate system icon shows the non-active coordinate systems. There are two ways to change the active coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE.

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the corner of the plate.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

NOTE: The active coordinate system is now on the center of the bolt circle.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-42 Set Active Coordinate System

• Current Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 10-43 Set Active Coordinate System from Review Features

Page 114: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 115: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

95Chapter 11: Checking a Part

Chapter 11: Checking a Part• Objective: The instructor will introduce nominals and how

to compare measured objects to them. The students will be able to measure a feature and have CAM2 Measure X determine if the dimension is out of tolerance.

NominalsWhat is a Nominal?

A nominal is the true value of a feature. The measured value of a part should be equal to or as close to the nominal value as possible. Compare to nominals to see if a part is good or bad, (or to update the print to match the part).

Types of Nominals

The engineering or design department will provide a 3D CAD (Computer Aided Design) file or a print that contains the nominal information for the part. CAM2 Measure X has several methods to enter nominals into the file for comparison to the measurements.

1 Enter Values: Circles, Cones, Cylinders, Ellipses, Lines, Planes, Points, Slots, and Spheres are created by typing the known value. This is typically used when working with a paper drawing or hard copy, rather than an electronic copy of the CAD file.

2 From CAD: Translate, and add CAD models through IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats. Then select the feature from the screen to add it to the CAM2 Measure X database as a nominal.

3 Construct Nominal: Sometimes, when working with CAD data, holes and other features are not displayed as separate entities, but rather they only exist as edges of surfaces or solids. CAM2 Measure X can construct a nominals by selecting points along the trimmed edge of a surface.

Page 116: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

96Chapter 11: Checking a Part

CAD to Part Alignments

Nominals are considered CAD and measurements are considered the Part. To compare measured data to nominals, a CAD to Part type alignment must be completed. This course will focus on the two commands; CAD=PART and ITERATIVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not compare the XYZ information of a measured feature to a nominal feature without an alignment.

CAD=Part

This command requires that some type of constructed coordinate system on the part using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD (or Nominal) coordinate system. This will overlay the measurements onto the CAD (or Nominal) data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system on the CAD (or Nominal) data. In many cases the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part. A rotation or a translation must be performed to get the coordinate system on the part to match the CAD (or Nominal) data.

The SCALE option allows the operator to adjust the measurement scale of the part, and adjust for temperature changes in the environment.

Important Topics - Checking a Part• CAD (or Nominal) data are the design values for the part.

• Create Nominal data in three different ways: From CAD, Enter Values, and Construct Nominals.

• A “CAD to Part” alignment must be successfully completed in order to compare measurements to nominals.

Page 117: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

97Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a drawing for nominal information. Measure alignment features, construct a coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Getting the Nominals

In this exercise check the demo part base using the reference drawing.

Datum features are specified in the print. The top surface is Datum A, the left edge is Datum B and the center circle is Datum C. Since the print does not show an X, Y, Z coordinate system, Datum A will be the XY plane, Datum B

FIGURE 12-1 FARO Demonstration Part

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

Page 118: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

98Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

will be the X axis and Datum C will be the origin of the coordinate system (This may vary depending on the part).

Setting the Alignment

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 12-3 Load Tolerances

Page 119: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

99Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

6 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

8 ❑ Measure Datum A as a plane.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 12-4 Probes

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 12-5 Measure XY Plane

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-6 Plane Results

Page 120: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

100Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

10 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

11 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

12 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

13 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 12-7 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-8 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 12-9 Measure X Axis

Page 121: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

101Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

14 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels

15 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

16 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

17 ❑ Measure Datum C as a circle.

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-10 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-11 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 12-12 Measure Circle 9

Page 122: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

102Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

19 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

20 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

21 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-13 Circle Results

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-15 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 123: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

103Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

This saves the position of the part as an alignment.

Begin checking the features on the part. Remember to perform the CAD to Part type alignment to see the measured compared to the nominal values.

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

FIGURE 12-16 Datum Alignment

• File name = Checking a Part.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 12-17 Save As

Page 124: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

104Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Measuring Features and Adding Nominals

After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the XYZ and diameter values can be extracted from the print:

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part base.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-18 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 12-19 Measure Circle 1

Page 125: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

105Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 12-20 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-21 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 126: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

106Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

6 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

7 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle

8 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured and the nominal.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 12-22 Results Tolerance Tab

FIGURE 12-23 Tabular Results

Page 127: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

107Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

10 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

11 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

12 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 12-24 Measure Circle 3

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 12-25 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-26 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 128: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

108Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

14 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the results. The nominal will be created in Review Features.

16 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the RESULTS. The nominal will be created in Review Features.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 12-27 Measure Circle 5

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key for compensation.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 12-28 Measure Circle 7

Page 129: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

109Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Adding a Nominal through Review Features

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE005_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

3 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

4 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

5 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

6 ❑ Select M_CIRCEL007_I from the SELECT A FEATURE list.

7 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

8 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 12-30 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 130: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

110Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

2 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Checking a Part.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-31 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 12-32 Report List

Page 131: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

111Chapter 12: Checking a Part Practical

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Filename = Checking a Part.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 12-33 Save Report

Page 132: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 133: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

113Chapter 13: Move Device Position

Chapter 13: Move Device Position• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to move

the measurement device to increase the working volume. After completing this section, the student will be able to move the measurement device, allowing them to measure large parts in a single file.

PurposeThe Move Device Position command has two functions:

• It moves the device to a new location within the coordinate system.

• It realigns the device to the part if the relationship has .

Moving the Device

This is the original intent for the Move Device Position command. It allows you measure a part on which the device can not measure the features from one location. Measure or more point-reducible features, run the Move Device Position command, move the device, and remeasure the features.

NOTE: Comp Axis points can not be used in the Move Device Position command. The compensation direction is based upon the active alignment. When the device moves, the active alignment is not valid.

There is a penalty. Every time the device is moved the device may incur error. To minimize the error, the features should be as far apart as possible while still allowing the device to move to the new location.

To maintain very accurate measurements avoid using the Move Device Position command by placing the device in an ideal location.

Page 134: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

114Chapter 13: Move Device Position

Realign the Part to the Device

If the setup gets , use the Move Device Position command to reestablish the alignment between the part and the device. There must be or more point-reducible features in the file. They should be as far apart as possible to minimize error.

NOTE: Periodic realignment is recommended when measuring large parts over an extended period of time. This is to compensate for variations caused by temperature changes or vibrations.

Important Topics - Move Device Position• The Move Device Position command may be used to move the device

to a new location or to realign the device to the part if the part has moved.

• After using the Move Device Position command, a loss of accuracy may occur.

Page 135: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

115Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Practical ExerciseIn this exercise align to a CAD file, relocate the Device relative to the part, and realign using the Move Device Position command.

Importing CAD File

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

FIGURE 14-1 FARO Demonstration Part

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-2 Drawing Units

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 136: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

116Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 14-3 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 14-4 FARO CAD Translator

Page 137: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

117Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Setting the Coordinate System

Another feature of CAM2 Measure X is the ability to create a new coordinate system by translating or rotating an existing coordinate system. This feature is helpful when you cannot construct a coordinate system from measured features on your part to correspond with the location of the coordinate system of the CAD model. In this exercise, in addition to learning the Move Device Position command, we will also practice translating a coordinate system. The steps below will guide you through the process.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part2.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 14-5 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 14-6 FARO_Demo_Part2 CAD file

Page 138: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

118Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-7 Probes

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-8 Measure XY Plane

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-9 Plane Results

Page 139: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

119Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

8 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-10 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-11 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-12 Measure Circle 9

Page 140: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

120Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

12 ❑ Measure a 2D line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G.

• Label = CIRCLE009_I.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-13 Circle 9 Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-14 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-15 Measure X Axis

Page 141: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

121Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

15 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 14-16 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. .

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009_I.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-17 3-2-1 Coordinate System

Page 142: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

122Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

16 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION. Use the following values:

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

18 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• X Offset = -150.0.

• Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Y Offset = -65.0.

• Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Z Offset = 0.0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-18 Translate Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-19 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 143: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

123Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

Save The Measurements

20 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

FIGURE 14-20 CAD to Part Alignment

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Move Device Position.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 14-21 Save As

Page 144: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

124Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Measure Features for the Move Device Position

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINTS > COMP OFF.

3 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-22 Probes

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-23 Measure Point 1

Page 145: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

125Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Measure Point 2.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-24 Point 1 Results

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-25 Measure Point 2

• Label = POINT002.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-26 Point 2 Results

Page 146: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

126Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

7 ❑ Measure Point 3.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Measure Point 4.

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-27 Measure Point 3

• Label = POINT003.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-28 Point 3 Results

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-29 Measure Point 4

Page 147: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

127Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Performing the Move Device Position Command

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select MOVE DEVICE POSITION.

NOTE: Using 2D features (Arc, Circle, Slot) CAM2 Measure X requires you to measure a plane for each feature.

2 ❑ Move the Measurment Device (Move the device, or move the part).

3 ❑ Click OK in the MOVE THE DEVICE dialog.

• Label = POINT004.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 14-30 Point 4 Results

• Selected Choices = M_POINT001, M_POINT002, M_POINT003, M_POINT004.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-31 Move Device Position

Page 148: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

128Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

4 ❑ Measure Point 1.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

6 ❑ Measure Point 2.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

8 ❑ Measure Point 3.

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-32 Measure Point 1

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-33 Measure Point 2

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-34 Measure Point 3

Page 149: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

129Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

10 ❑ Measure Point 4.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the point. The results of the Device Move are displayed.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the new Device Position.

• Take a point by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key to end the measurement.

FIGURE 14-35 Measure Point 4

FIGURE 14-36 Device Position Results

Page 150: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

130Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Add Measurements to an Existing FeatureIf you have a large feature that can not be totally measured from one location, CAM2 Measure X allows you to add points to the feature. This will update the feature location and all associated constructions, coordinate systems, and dimensions used with this feature.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

3 ❑ Select M_CIRCLE009_I.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 14-37 Probes

FIGURE 14-38 Review Features

Page 151: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

131Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

4 ❑ Click the EDIT button.

5 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

The points, or Readings, are now added to the feature and M_CIRCLE009_I is recalculated.

6 ❑ Click on the READINGS tab.

NOTE: The measured circle has points, or Readings, from both device positions.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Select the ADD READINGS radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 14-39 Add Readings

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 14-40 Measure Circle 9

FIGURE 14-41 Circle 9 Readings

Page 152: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

132Chapter 14: Move Device Position Practical

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

Page 153: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

133Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

The Measurement TrackThere are numerous ways to approach the same task, and some ways are easier than others. This section presents the Measurement Track, a good rule of thumb procedure to help guide you through the measurement tasks.

Examine the Task

Before you start taking measurements, determine why the part is being inspected and what results are expected. Measuring without direction will yield voluminous data that will make it difficult to find the answers to the original question. Knowing the goal in advance will save a great deal of time.

Setup Considerations

Before beginning to measure a part, ensure that the device can reach all the features to be measured. This can eliminate device movements due to the inability to reach features.

Setting the Coordinate System and Alignment

The coordinate system and alignment created will depend on the purpose for measuring the part and the amount of data available. The two most commonly used alignment options are (1) a CAD=Part type alignment to a constructed coordinate system, and (2) an Iterative alignment. Following are some examples of when one method may be preferred to another.

1 Coordinate System / CAD = Part.

• The part requires a specific set of datums be followed.

• The objective is to trouble-shoot the part.

2 Iterative.

• For use if there is no clear datum scheme.

• The datum scheme allows for a best fit.

• If a Coordinate System/CAD=Part approach shows the part to be slightly out of specification. In such a case, it is possible a best fit alignment will show the part to be within specification.

Page 154: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

134Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Always set the alignment as soon as possible during a measurement session. Many commands depend upon the alignment to operate correctly.

Save the file as soon as the alignment is complete. If anything goes wrong, reopen the file with the saved alignment. Continue to save frequently.

Data Collection

Although it is probably more efficient to perform the measurements, constructions, and dimensions first, then add nominals at a later time, it is not very practical.

With large parts, it is best to break up the work session into smaller sections. Within each section, perform the measurements within that area and assign their nominals. Follow with the constructions and dimensions, and add their nominals. When each section is done, save the file then move onto the next section.

This process will help prevent confusion with lists of features. All the data in the database will be grouped in the area in which the measurements were taken.

Data Output

Know what sort of output data is expected from the part, IGES data, graphical report, text report, etc.

Remember that printed reports will always be printed in the current coordinate system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, make sure the correct coordinate system is set active before printing.

When exporting CAD data, always complete the CAD = PART alignment command. The data will always be exported in the World Coordinate System. A file without a CAD to Part type alignment will not produce the expected results when the data is imported into another system.

Other Hints

Holes: If features are not on the same plane, modify the AUTO PLANE SELECT preference and choose define. The MEASURE < CIRCLE command will prompt you to measure a plane before each circle. This preferences sets all other 2D commands to work in the same manner.

Surfaces: Choose Select Nominal Surfaces Only in the Auto Nominal Association part preference. This will automatically select the nearest Nominal surface for inspection and not any previously measured features.

Page 155: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

135Chapter 15: Tips and Tricks

Clearing up the view: To clear up the graphics screen:

• Choose VIEW < LAYERS. Entities may be moved from one layer to another. Also, filters may be created and activated to group and sort several layers at once. To clean up the display, filter out those layers you do not wish to view.

• Choose VIEW < ARRANGE LABELS to automatically arrange the on-screen labels. To hide all labels, choose VIEW < PROPERTIES and click the VISUAL OBJECTS tab. Clear the MAIN LABEL VIEW check box and click APPLY.

• Pin or unpin the control bars. Unpin the control bars to minimize them and enlarge the graphics field. When needed, click the icon and the control bar will “fly out” for use. Pin the control bars to anchor them for constant view.

Page 156: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 157: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Advanced Topics

Page 158: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 159: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

139Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to use CAD as nominals and establish alignments. CAM2 SPC Graph will be used to create a graphical report. After completing this section, the student will learn how to use CAD as nominals and generate graphical reports.

Why Work with CAD?CAM2 Measure X makes it easy to use CAD as nominals for measurement.

CAD TerminologyTypes of CAD Data

Wireframe: These entities define the outline of a part. They can include points, circles, arcs, lines, polylines, and splines. A polyline is a bunch of line segments stitched together to approximate a curve. A spline is simple curve.

Surface: A surface is used to define the outer boundary of a part. Surfaces are typically used to define the geometry of complex curved parts, such as automotive and aerospace sheet metal parts. Surfaces are very popular for creating cutting paths for CNC cutting tools.

Solid: A solid model is also used to define the outer boundary of a part, but solids have a thickness or mass. Solid modeling is popular for the design of a variety of parts. Many CAD systems start with a solid model then create the 2D drawings and 3D surfaces from the solid.

Page 160: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

140Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Standard CAD Data File Formats

The following CAD data file formats are included with CAM2 Measure X. Translators for other CAD data file formats are available and must be purchased from FARO.

IGES

IGES (Initial Graphics Exchange Standard) was created to standardize data transfer between different CAD systems. IGES works very well for surface and wireframe entities, but not for text and dimensions.

3DM

3DM is the native file format for Rhinoceros® software (Rhino 3D). Rhino can create, edit, analyze, and translate NURBS curves, surfaces, and solids. Supported formats include DWG/DXF, SAT (ACIS), X_T (Parasolid), STEP, VDA and IGES among others.

VDA

VDA is similar to IGES in that it is a standard used to translate data between different CAD systems. VDA is particularly prevalent in Europe.

Page 161: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

141Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Measurement TemplateThe Measurement Template command provides a quick method to create nominals, assign nominals, and guide you in the measurement of the part. You can run the Measurement Template command any time during the measurement process, but its primary function is to save time in the preliminary measurement and alignment tasks.

NOTE: A CAD file is not required to run the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE command.

Iterative Alignment (Best Fit)The ITERATIVE alignment command allows the use of several point-reducible features to best-fit them to their corresponding nominal values.

FIGURE 16-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

3

75

1

7

53

1

M

N

Page 162: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

142Chapter 16: Checking a Part with CAD

Unlike CAD=PART, ITERATIVE does not require a constructed coordinate system. CAM2 Measure X will use the coordinate system defined in the CAD model.

Automatic Nominal AssociationAfter a CAD to Part alignment is complete, CAM2 Measure X will automatically look for the nearest nominal feature and associate it to the current measurement. Auto Nominal is an option in PREFERENCES. The default setting is ON when CAM2 Measure X is installed.

NOTE: Changing the label of the measured feature in the RESULTS dialog box will change the label of any nominal that has been automatically associated.

Important Topics - Checking a Part With CAD

• CAD files can be translated though IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats.

• Always add CAD data before measuring.

• At least 3 point reducible features are required for the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT command.

FIGURE 16-1 M = Measured data N =Nominal data

7

53

1M

N

Page 163: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

143Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, modify the on-screen labels, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Translating an IGES File

Always translate, and add CAD data to the drawing file before doing any measurements. If the features are measured first and then the CAD data is added, the results may be poor because the CAD data and measurements may not align properly.

FIGURE 17-1 FARO Demonstration Part

E

12

3

45

6

7

89

10F

A

C D

B

G

P1 P2

P3 P4

Page 164: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

144Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 17-3 Load Tolerances

Page 165: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

145Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 17-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 17-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 166: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

146Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X can translate the IGES, VDA, CATIA® v4 and v5, Unigraphics®, Parasolid®, SolidWorks®, Solid Edge® and OpenNURBS formats.

Measuring the Alignment Features

Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

FIGURE 17-6 FARO_Demo_Part1 CAD file

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 17-7 Probes

Page 167: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

147Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

3 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 17-8 Measurement Template

• Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-9 Circle 1

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-10 Circle 1 Results

Page 168: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

148Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

5 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

• Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-11 Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-12 Circle 3 Results

• Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 17-13 Circle 7

Page 169: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

149Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

10 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plan has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command.

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 17-14 Circle 7 Results

FIGURE 17-15 Measurement Template

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-16 Select Plane

Page 170: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

150Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

NOTE: Since two features are being measured at once (plane and circle), move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 17-17 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-18 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 17-19 Measure Circle 3

Page 171: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

151Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-20 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 17-21 Measure Circle 7

FIGURE 17-22 Measurement Results

Page 172: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

152Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Setting an Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-23 Iterative Alignment

• Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 17-24 Iterative Alignment Results

Page 173: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

153Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

Save The Measurements

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

Measure the Remaining Features

Now that the part has been aligned to the CAD data, continue to measure the remaining features on the part. Notice that when measuring features, a representation of the SMR on the screen that shows the current location of the SMR.

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: All of the circles on this part are in the same plane, therefore any of the circles can be selected as the plane for the next measured circle.

• File name = Cad to Part.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 17-25 Save As

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-26 Select Plane

Page 174: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

154Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

3 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

Notice that there is more information in the RESULTS dialog box for each measured circle. After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X automatically searches for a nominal for each measured feature. If a nominal is found, it is automatically associated to the measured feature. You will the see the comparison between the measured and nominal features.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Modifying On-Screen Labels

Take a look at the screen. Before running the REVIEW FEATURES command to print a report, add more information to the on-screen labels and arrange the labels in the graphics field.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Choose each of the measured circles. Hold down CTRL key and click the left mouse button to pick each circle.

3 ❑ Click on the LABELS tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 17-27 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 17-28 Circle 5 Results

Page 175: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

155Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

4 ❑ Select the Tolerance Bar, Actual, Nominal, and Deviation check boxes. Notice that the labels in the Preview window are updating.

5 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box. Now, arrange the labels around the part.

6 ❑ Press the L hot key to automatically arrange the labels around the graphics filed.

7 ❑ Use the mouse and drag, left mouse click and hold, any of the on-screen labels to another area of the graphics filed and release the mouse button to finish.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

FIGURE 17-29 Labels tabs

• Operator’s Name = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = CAD to Part.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-30 Enter Header Information

Page 176: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

156Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = unchecked.NOTE: Since you manually arranged the on-screen labels, make sure that this check box is cleared.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 17-31 Report List

Page 177: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

157Chapter 17: Checking a Part with CAD Practical

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• Filename = CAD to Part.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 17-32 Save Report

Page 178: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 179: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

159Chapter 18: Surface Measurement

Chapter 18: Surface Measurement• OBJECTIVE: The instructor will demonstrate how to inspect

a part with points. After this section, the student will be able to align a CAD model and compare any point on a part to a CAD surface. They will also be able to learn how to check a specific XYZ coordinate and compare it to the nominal.

Why Measure a Surface?There are two major reasons to measure curved surfaces: to see if the shape of the part is correct, or to see if a component is located correctly in an assembly.

Tools and fixtures may be measured to compare them to the nominal CAD surfaces of the part. This often helps to identify problems in manufacturing when trying to determine if a tool is the source of a problem or if the component is out of specification.

Surface Measurement CommandsInspect Surface

This is the easiest way to measure a surface. After selecting the INSPECT SURFACE command, place the SMR on the part, press the INSERT key, pull back, and press the HOME key. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface.

Surface Edge Point

This point checks the trim edge of a part to the edge of a CAD surface. After selecting the SURFACE EDGE POINT command, place the SMR on the part, press the INSERT key, pull back and press the HOME key. CAM2 Measure X will compare the measured point to the surface edge.

Surface Point

If a CAD surface is not available and you need to measure a point on a surface, use the SURFACE POINT command. After selecting the SURFACE POINT command, measure three or more points in a small triangular pattern, then pull off the surface and press the HOME key. The points are used to determine the surface normal vector, which is then used for SMR compensation. This results in an XYZ point with an IJK vector.

Page 180: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

160Chapter 18: Surface Measurement

Home In Point

To measure a surface at a specific location, use the HOME IN command. This is one of the more complex functions within CAM2 Measure X, but it is extremely useful when checking tools, jigs, and fixtures.

There is a small question of SMR compensation. CAM2 Measure X provides three different SMR compensation options.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface at the XYZ point location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-plane (INSERT key) and one compensation point (HOME key).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the SMR to an exact XYZ location, the HOME IN command requires a HOME IN ZONE or diameter. The home in zone allows you to take a point within a cylindrical area around the point.

Important Topics - Surface Measurement• The two reasons to check a surface:

1 To see if the shape of the part is correct.

2 To see if a component is located correctly in a assembly.

• The three options for the SMR compensation vector are:

1 Key In2 Select Surface3 Sample Surface

Page 181: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

161Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a CAD file for nominal information. Measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, check a few surfaces by measuring surface points, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Translating and Adding the CAD data

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

FIGURE 19-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

S1

S2

Page 182: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

162Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-3 Load Tolerances

Page 183: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

163Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 19-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 19-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 184: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

164Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

FIGURE 19-6 Bracket1 CAD file

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-7 Probes

Page 185: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

165Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-8 Measure XY Plane

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the plane.

FIGURE 19-9 Plane Results

• SMR = 0.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-10 Probes

Page 186: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

166Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

8 ❑ Measure the line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-11 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-12 Measure Line 1

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 19-13 Line Results

S1

S2

Page 187: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

167Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

10 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-14 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the line.

FIGURE 19-15 Line Results

FIGURE 19-16 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

S1

S2

Page 188: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

168Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

A plane and two lines can be used to construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-17 Line/Line Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-18 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 189: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

169Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Save the Measurements

This was a lot of work, save the file.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

2 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

FIGURE 19-19 Aligned to CAD Model

• File name = Surface Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 19-20 Save As

Page 190: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

170Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Checking a Surface

After a CAD to Part alignment has been completed CAM2 Measure X will try to associate the closest nominal feature to any measurement. For Surface point measurements the default preferences are to select all surfaces both measured and nominal. Since this CAD model is complete, changing this surface option to ignore the measured surfaces will make the measuring process easier.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

3 ❑ Click OK.

4 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

Inspect the surfaces of the CAD model.

• Automatically Associate Nominals = checked (or On).

• Features:

• Nominal Feature Search Radius = 5.0.

• Display Nominal Result = unchecked (or Off).

• Surfaces = Select Nominal Surfaces Only.

FIGURE 19-21 Auto Nominal Association

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-22 Probes

Page 191: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

171Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

Checking an Edge

Since we are checking an edge there will be 3 surfaces within the Auto Nominal zone (top, bottom and side). The Auto Nominal function may not select the correct surface. By turning off the Auto Nominal and selecting the surface manually the correct surface can be selected.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

• Move the SMR close to the part; the nearest surface will turn red.

• Press the INSERT key to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-23 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the distance to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-24 Inspect Surface Point Results

Page 192: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

172Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ Select AUTO NOMINAL ASSOCIATION.

3 ❑ Click OK.

4 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Automatically Associate Nominals = clear (or Off).

FIGURE 19-25 Auto Nominal Association

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-26 Probes

Page 193: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

173Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE EDGE POINT.

6 ❑ Measure the point.

• Using the mouse, left mouse click to select the upper surface.

NOTE: A drop-down menu will appear listing all the surfaces and curves near the area selected. As you scroll down the drop down list, the surface or curve will highlight red.

• Left click to chose the appropriate surface or curve.

FIGURE 19-27 Select the Surface

• Place the SMR on the edge of the part near the red surface.

• Press the INSERT key to measure, pull the probe away from the surface, and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 19-28 Measuring a Surface Edge Point

S1

S2

Page 194: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

174Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ Measure some more surface edges.

Using Home In Points

For this example, construct a few nominal points.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES. Use the following values:

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-29 Surface Edge Point Results

X Y Z

Point 1 55.0 36.5 41.0

Point 2 95.0 36.5 41.0

Point 3 135.0 36.5 41.0

• Enter the nominal information from the table above.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK to create the point

• Click OK to accept the nominal results.

• Repeat the command for each point.

FIGURE 19-30 Construct Point Enter Values

Page 195: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

175Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

2 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

Measure Point 1 using the Home In command and an entered (key in) vector.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 19-31 Probes

• Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_POINT001. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = KEY IN.

• Approach Vector: I=0, J=-1, K=0

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 19-32 Create Home In Point

Page 196: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

176Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

4 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow the on-screen guide to the point.

Measure Point 2 using the Home In command and sample the surface to determine the vector for compensation.

NOTE: For this option the approach vector will be different than the compensation vector. The approach will be set along the direction of the current view.

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

6 ❑ Move the probe to the part and follow on-screen guide to an enlarged home-in zone. Measure three points by pressing the INSERT key.

• Press the INSERT key, to measure when the SMR is in the zone.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 19-33 Home-in Results

• Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_POINT002. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 19-34 Create Home In Point

Page 197: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

177Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

7 ❑ Use a triangular pattern just as measuring a surface point. This will determine the compensation vector.

• Pull back and press the HOME key to define the compensation vector direction.

8 ❑ Move the SMR to the part and follow the guide to the point.

Measure Point 3 using the Home In command and select the surface to determine the vector for probe compensation.

9 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

• Press the INSERT key, to measure when in the zone.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal point in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 19-35 Home-in Results

• Click the ADD button.

• Coordinate = N_POINT003. Use the COORDINATE drop-down or the FROM

SCREEN button to select the point.

• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to exit the HOME-IN dialog box and begin measuring.

FIGURE 19-36 Create Home In Point

Page 198: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

178Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

10 ❑ Take a look at the Output Bar. CAM2 Measure X is prompting to select a surface.

11 ❑ Move the SMR to the part and follow on-screen guide to the point.

• Left mouse click on the top surface near the point.

• Select the correct Surface.

FIGURE 19-37 Select a Surface

• Press the INSERT key, to measure when in the zone.

• Pull back from the surface and Press the HOME key for compensation.

• Notice the measurements and the comparison to the nominal surface in the RESULTS dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the point.

FIGURE 19-38 Home-in Results

Page 199: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

179Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Surface Measurement.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-39 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 19-40 Report List

Page 200: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

180Chapter 19: Surface Measurement Practical

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Save Again

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X now uses all the information entered when the SAVE AS command was selected previously. To change the file name, select SAVE AS and type a different file name.

• File name = Surface Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 19-41 Save Report

Page 201: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Practical ExerciseSet the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be your base plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin, respectively.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

FIGURE 20-1 Faro Demonstration Bracket

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-2 Drawing Units

S1

S2

181Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 202: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 20-3 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 20-4 FARO CAD Translator

182d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 203: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 20-5 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 20-6 Bracket 1.igs file

183Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 204: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-7 Probes

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 20-8 Measure XY Plane

184d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 205: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training Workbookn 1.0 - January 2008

Versio

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key to reject. Then re-measure the fea-ture.

FIGURE 20-9 Plane Results

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = Edge Nest.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-10 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are pro-jected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-11 Select Plane

185Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 206: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

8 ❑ Measure the line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 20-12 Measure Line 1

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 20-13 Line Results

S1

S2

186d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 207: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 20-14 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 20-15 Line Results

S1

S2

187Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 208: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning a

188

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

4 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-16 Line/Line coordinate system

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-17 CAD=Part Alignment

• File name = Surface Profile.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 20-18 Save As

nd Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 209: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Scan Measurement Preference

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, select MISCELLANEOUS.

4 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger.

• Maximum Distance = 1000000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 20-19 Feature Scanning

• Save Scan Lines as Fea-tures = Yes.

FIGURE 20-20 Feature Scanning

189Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 210: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

190

Parallel Lock Planes

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 20-21 Probes

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).

• Number of Planes = 100.

• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-22 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-23 Select Plane

d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 211: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Scan the surface.

NOTE: Scan one surface at a time.

5 ❑ Save the scan data.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the polyline results.

Show Surface Deviation

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Press the INSERT key to begin scanning.

• Move the SMR across the surface contour.

• Press the INSERT key to pause the scan.

• Press the HOME key to end the scan.

FIGURE 20-24 Parallel Locked Scanning

• To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key.

• To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.

FIGURE 20-25 Keep Data?

191Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 212: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

2 ❑ Select the M_SURFACE###-### polyline features.

3 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Rescale Whiskers

The whiskers will now give a graphical display of deviation to the CAD surface. A green whisker shows a deviation less than the tolerance. A yellow whisker shows deviation greater than seventy-five percent of the tolerance. A red whisker shows a deviation greater than the tolerance.

1 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > DECREASE. This will reduce the whisker length.

2 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select WHISKER > INCREASE. This will increase the whisker length.

3 ❑ Rescale the Whiskers on the part to best view the deviation.

• Readings = checked.

• Whiskers = checked.

FIGURE 20-26 Surface Whiskers

FIGURE 20-27 Whiskers

192d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 213: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST dialog box shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW dialog box shows a preview of the report.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Surface Pro-file.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-28 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• Select all M_SURFACE###-### fea-tures. All other features unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 20-29 Report List

193Chapter 20: Scanning and Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 214: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 20: Scanning an

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit the REPORT PREVIEW dialog box.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit the REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

• Filename = Sur-face Profile.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 20-30 Save Report

194d Comparing to CAD Practical

Page 215: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measurement• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use

points for inspection. After completing this section, the student will be able to use the surface point commands to inspect parts.

Point MeasurementsComp Off and Comp Axis

Comp Off points do not compensate. The point will be taken at the center of the SMR. These points are idea for use in all Device Position commands and to check movement in the part or measurement device. Comp Axis points will compensate along a coordinate axis, so they may only be used to measure surfaces that are parallel to the coordinate planes: , and . the

HOME key must be pressed after pulling away to the coordinate plane the point will compensate towards.

High Point and Low Point

These commands will find the point furthest (High Point) or nearest (Low Point) to a Plane, Line, or Point. When the Scan Measurement Part Preference is On, these commands capture points as it receives them from the measurement device.

Surface Measurements

If the surface is not parallel to a coordinate plane, the command must be used. This command uses three or more measured points and a compensation point to calculate a single point on a small planar surface.

Probe Center

XYZ to beinspected

How do we determine thevector?

Surface

195Chapter 21: Point Measurement

Page 216: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 21: Point Measu

The command guides the measurement device to a specific XYZ location to measure a point.

CAM2 Measure X provides three different SMR compensation options for the Home in command.

• Option 1 - Key in IJK compensation direction (if it is known).

• Option 2 - Extract the compensation direction from a CAD surface. This direction is the normal vector of the surface, at the XYZ point location.

• Option 3 - Sample the compensation direction from the part surface by measuring the surface. Sample surface requires three points in a mini-plane (INSERT key) and one compensation point (HOME key).

If the vector is known, use Option 1. If a CAD surface is available, use Option 2. If the vector is not known and a CAD surface is not available, use Option 3.

Since it is very difficult to move the SMR to an exact XYZ location, the Home In command requires a Home In Zone. The surface you are measuring should approximate a flat plane within the Home In zone. If the surface is curved, your measurement may include .

Home In Zone (diameter)

Home In Vector

Final Compensated Point

Home In Vector

R Cur

vatur

e

R ZoneR Zone

Surface

Measured point with error

196rement

Page 217: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

To calculate the maximum Home In Zone, use the following equation:

Enter the maximum acceptable cosine error and the radius of curvature of the surface and get the maximum allowable Home In Zone radius. Usually, the cosine error will be much smaller than the accuracy of the measurement device.

Checking the Same Points on Another Part

The list of points in the Home In command may be saved to file. CAM2 Measure X creates an ASCII text file with all the data. The Home In command can import the file to check the same location on another similar part. The Home In file has the extension *.hmi.

The Home In command also saves and imports the ACL format (GOTO/ X, Y, Z, I, J, K). The ACL file has the extension *.acl.

Important Topics - Point Measurement• Home In Point files (*.hmi) allow you to save a series of home-in

points to be saved for use in other measurement sessions.

• The Select Surface Home In option requires a CAD surface.

R Zone:= RCurvature2 _ R( Curvature _ ErrorCosine)2

197Chapter 21: Point Measurement

Page 218: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 219: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

PRACTICAL - Surface Measurement1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 22-2 Load Tolerances

199Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 220: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 22-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 22-4 Adding CAD Parts

200rement Practical

Page 221: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ZOOM ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Measuring the Alignment Features

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

FIGURE 22-5 Bracket 1.igs file

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-6 Probes

201Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 222: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

6 ❑ Select the EDGE NEST SMR.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 22-7 Measure XY Plane

• Label = PLANE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-8 Plane Results

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = Edge Nest.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-9 Probes

202rement Practical

Page 223: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

9 ❑ Measure the line.

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-10 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 22-11 Measure Line 1

• Label = LINE001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-12 Line Results

S1

S2

203Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 224: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

11 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take the three or four points along the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 22-13 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-14 Line Results

FIGURE 22-15 CAD Model with Measured Alignment Features

S1

S2

204rement Practical

Page 225: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Constructing the Alignment

The correct amount of measured features for a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system has been measured. These features are a measured match for the nominal coordinate system.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 22-16 Line/Line Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-17 CAD=Part Alignment

205Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 226: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

High Points

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

2 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

3 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

NOTE: The SCAN MEASUREMENT may be turned on or off using the X key on the keyboard.

FIGURE 22-18 Aligned to CAD Model

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger

• Maximum Distance = 1000000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 0.0.

FIGURE 22-19 Scan Measurement Preference

206rement Practical

Page 227: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < HIGH POINT.

6 ❑ Place the SMR on the top of the sphere.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 22-20 Probes

• Select a Feature = M_PLANE001.

• Feature Type = Plane Reducible.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-21 Select Feature

• Press the INSERT key and scan over the top of the surface.

• Press the INSERT key to pause the scan.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 22-22 Measure High Point

207Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 228: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Home-in Options

Before using the Home-in function to inspect points, create some of the nominal points that will be checked.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < ENTER VALUES.

• Label = POINT001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-23 Point Results

Label X Y Z

HMI_1 55.00 36.50 41.00

HMI_2 55.00 49.00 66.20

HMI_3 55.00 25.00 14.49

• Enter the nominal information from the table above.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Choose the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK to create the point

FIGURE 22-24 Construct Point Enter Values

208rement Practical

Page 229: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ Repeat these steps for each point.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

5 ❑ From PART PREFERENCES, select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

6 ❑ Click OK in the PREFERENCES dialog box to exit.

• Label = see table.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 22-25 Point Results

• Type of Scanning = No Scanning.

FIGURE 22-26 Scan Measurement Preference

209Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 230: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

Three Coordinates, Key-in I, J, K

1 ❑ From MEASURE menu, select POINT < HOME IN.

2 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector is 0,-1,0. This is known because of the orientation of the part. The approach is from the negative Y direction, so a negative J value is used. Note how only the Y value will change when the point is measured.

Three Coordinates, Select Surface

1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector will be extracted from the surface, normal to the surface at the location of the nominal point.

• Coordinate = N_HMI_1.

• Approach Vector: I = 0, J = -1, K = 0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = KEY IN.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-27 Create Home In Point

• Coordinate = N_HMI_2.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = SELECT SURFACE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-28 Create Home In Point

210rement Practical

Page 231: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Three Coordinates, Sample Surface

1 ❑ Click the ADD button.

NOTE: The approach vector is calculated from the small sampled plane that is digitized within a enlarged Home In Zone. This method should be used in the absence of CAD surfaces.

Save the Home In File

Before measuring the Home In Points, save the points to a file that may be imported directly into the Home In command later. This is an excellent way of taking point and vector data on one part and then using the XYZ, IJK data to inspect another part using the Home In format.

1 ❑ Click the EXPORT FILE button.

Measure the Home In Points

1 ❑ Click the OK button in the HOME IN POINT dialog box to start measuring the three points.

2 ❑ Measure HMI_1.

NOTE: One measurement point is required to capture the point. The

• Coordinate = N_HMI_3.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Rotation Angle = 0.

• Home-In Zone = 1.0.

• Approach Vector = SAMPLE SURFACE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 22-29 Create Home In Point

• File name = your initials - Home In.

• Save as Type = Home In Files (*.hmi).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 22-30 Save HIM file.

211Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 232: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 22: Point Measu

measured point will be offset for the radius of the probe along the surface vector that was entered.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is prompting the operator to select a surface of HMI_2.

5 ❑ Measure HMI_2.

NOTE: One measurement point and one compensation point is required to capture the point. The compensation point is required to determine which side of the CAD surface the point was measured.

• Label = HMI_1.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-31 Point Results

• Using the mouse click on the top surface.

• Select the face on the outer surface of the part.

FIGURE 22-32 Select Surface

S1

S2

212rement Practical

Page 233: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Measure HMI_3.

NOTE: Four measurement points and one compensation point are required to capture the point. The first three measurement and compensation points are used to determine the surface vector. The last measurement point is used to capture the point.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = HMI_2.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-33 Point Results

• Label = HMI_3.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 22-34 Point Results

213Chapter 22: Point Measurement Practical

Page 234: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 235: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Sheet Metal Measurements• OBJECTIVE: To understand how sheet metal

measurements differ from regular measurement types. The student will learn techniques on how to measure sheet metal trim lines.

Simple Features

Sheet metal measurements are very similar to ordinary measurements. , , , and are measured with the same method as normal measurements, with the exception of adding a material thickness.

The reason for material thickness is due to the difficulty keeping the SMR on the edge of a very thin piece of sheet metal. Falling off the edge of the sheet metal would cause an incorrect value for feature size and incorrect position.

CAM2 Measure X compensates for the possibility of falling off the edge with simple geometry functions using the measured plane of projection and the thickness value entered for the material.

Unique Sheet Metal Measurements

There are two specific sheet metal measurements: Edge Point and Hemmed Edge Point.

The Trimmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on the sheet metal edge, which may then be compared to a nominal line or curve representing the nominal edge.

The Hemmed Edge Point command is for measuring a point on a hemmed edge. A hemmed edge is one piece of sheet metal folded over the end of another piece of sheet metal, like on the edge of a car door.

Radius for Compensation

Material Edge

Probe Equator

Ball Probe

215Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Page 236: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 23: Sheet Metal

Both the Trimmed Edge and the Hemmed Edge points require a sheet metal thickness value. Both are measured by digitizing three points near the edge, in a small plane, and two points on the edge, next to the plane. The resulting point compensates for the SMR and the sheet metal thickness and calculates a point.

Surface Points

Sheet metal parts may also be measured using the surface point commands, Home In, Inspect Surface, and Surface Point. Since these commands are not specific to sheet metal measurements, the material thickness must be activated manually. The M hot key displays the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog box while any sheet metal command is active. Material Thickness may also be set in preferences. Only sheet metal commands will use the material thickness value.

CAD Side and Other Side

There are situations with many sheet metal parts where the nominal point is on the other side of the sheet metal surface. Since the material thickness is constant throughout the part, CAM2 Measure allows the measurement of a sheet metal part from the other side.

This setting is all about what side of the part that is being touched with the SMR, the CAD SIDE, or the OTHER SIDE.

FIGURE 23-1 Other Side

CAD Side

Other Side(Nominal)

216 Measurement

Page 237: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Dynamic Nominals

With CAM2 Measure X, any type of nominal feature may be associated to any type of measured feature. This is called Dynamic Nominals. For Example:

Measured circles may use a nominal line to compare X, Y and Z values. The nominal line does not contain a diameter. CAM2 Measure will deactivate the diameter tolerance.

Important Facts - Sheet Metal and Fixture Measurement

• It is important to enter the correct material thickness for sheet metal measurements.

• For Inspect Surface points to compensate through the material, the OTHER SIDE Sheet Metal option will be selected.

• Dynamic nominals will not auto-nominal. They must associated manually.

FIGURE 23-2 Dynamic Nominals

Nominal Line

Measured Circle

217Chapter 23: Sheet Metal Measurement

Page 238: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 239: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISE1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click MATERIAL.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 24-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 24-2 Load Tolerances

• Material Compensation = checked.

• Direction = CAD Side.

• Thickness = Single.

• Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 24-3 Material Compensation

219Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 240: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 24-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 24-5 Adding CAD Parts

220 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 241: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen (or press the 7 key).

Constructing Nominals

10 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

FIGURE 24-6 Shell1.igs

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-7 Construct P1

221Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 242: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• Label = P1.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 24-8 Circle Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-9 Construct P2

222 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 243: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• Label = P2.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 24-10 Circle Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Using the mouse click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-11 Construct P3

223Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 244: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Using the Measurement Template

16 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

17 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

• Label = P3.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 24-12 Circle Results

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-13 Probes

• Click the FROM SCREEN button .

• Using the mouse, select the 3 nominal circles P1, P2, and P3.

• Click the right mouse button to return to the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog.

• Change the MEASURE AS drop downs from CIRCLE to PLNPNT (Planar Point).

FIGURE 24-14 Measurement Template

224 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 245: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

18 ❑ Click OK in the MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE dialog to measure the three circles.

19 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

20 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

21 ❑ Measure P1.

22 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-15 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-16 Measure P1

225Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 246: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

23 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

24 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

25 ❑ Measure P2.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

27 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-17 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-18 Measure P2

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

226 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 247: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

28 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

29 ❑ Measure P3.

30 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ Fom the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-19 Measure XY Plane

• Take one or two points in the hole by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-20 Measure P3

• Select M_P1, M_P2 and M_P3.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 24-21 Iterative Alignment

227Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 248: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Compare to Straight Nominal Edge

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < TRIMMED POINT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

• CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click 2 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points right.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-22 Construct Nominal Line

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the line.

FIGURE 24-23 Line Results

228 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 249: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

7 ❑ Measure the edge.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-24 Measure Plane

• Take two or three points on the edge by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the edge and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-25 Construct Nominal Line

229Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 250: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab and view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Select Nominal = N_LINE001.

FIGURE 24-26 Trimmed Point Results

FIGURE 24-27 Trimmed Point Results

230 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 251: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Compare Nominal Circles

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-28 Construct Circle 13

• Label = CIRCLE_13.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 24-29 Circle Results

231Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 252: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

3 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

4 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

6 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

7 ❑ Measure the plane on the side of the shell.

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = 0.25 diameter pin nest.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-30 Probes

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points on the side of the shell by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-31 Measure Plane

232 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 253: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Measure the circle.

9 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

10 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Take three or four points on the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the circle and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-32 Measure Circle

• Select Nominal = N_CIRCLE_13.

FIGURE 24-33 Measured Circle Results

233Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 254: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

Compare Nominal Round Slots

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select ROUND SLOT < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SHEET METAL < ROUND SLOT.

4 ❑ Click OK on the MATERIAL THICKNESS dialog, it should have the same values entered earlier.

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 6 points (or 2 circles with 3 points each).

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points to the right.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 24-34 Construct Slot F

• Label = SLOT_F.

• Click OK to accept the slot.

FIGURE 24-35 Round Slot Results

234 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 255: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

6 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the shell.

7 ❑ Measure the slot.

• Select a Plane = DEFINE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points on the top of the shell by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-36 Measure Plane

• Take three or four points on the first end of the slot by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull to the center of the arc and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-37 Measure Round Slot

235Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 256: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

9 ❑ Click the REPORT tab to view the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the slot.

Compare Nominal Surfaces

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Take three or four points on the second end of the slot by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull to the center of the arc and press the HOME key.

• Select Nominal = N_SLOT_F.

FIGURE 24-38 Round Slot Results

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 24-39 Probes

FIGURE 24-37 Measure Round Slot

236 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 257: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Click the M hot key on the keyboard to bring up the Material Thickness dialog box.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the material thickness.

5 ❑ Measure a point on the opposite side of the material.

Note: Even though you took the point on the opposite side of the part CAM2 Measure compensated the extra amount for the material.

• Material Compensation = checked.

• Direction = Other Side.

• Thickness = Single.

• Material Thickness = 3.175.

FIGURE 24-40 Material Compensation

• Move the SMR to the underside of the part. When the surface turns red click the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and click the HOME key.

FIGURE 24-41

237Chapter 24: Sheet Metal and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 258: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 24: Sheet Metal

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

• Label = SURFACE001.

FIGURE 24-42 Inspect Surface Results

238 and Surface Measurement Practical

Page 259: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Round Tubing• Objective - The instructor will introduce the tube

measurement routines in CAM2 Measure. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to measure tubes, construct nominal tubes, and generate an inspection report.

Tubing Part Preferences

Tubing Turn Direction - Clockwise or Counterclockwise. This preference will be based upon the tube-bending machine. When the machine turns the tube it may be rotated in the clockwise or counterclockwise (default) direction. Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report.

Tubing Turn Angle - Relative or Absolute. This preference will be based upon the bending machine. When the machine bends the angle the bend is referenced to the first segment (absolute) or to the last segment (relative - default). Changing this preference will affect the nominal construction and measurement report.

Break Point Type - Intersection or Segment End. This preference will construct the intersection points from the intersection of the cylinder segments (Intersection - default) or the intersections of the cylinders with the toroid (Segment End).

Measure Tube Bends - All Bends or Required Bends. This preference determines if the toroid of the tube will be measured. When set to All Bends, you will measure the cylinders and bends. When set to Required Bends (default), only bend angles of 180 degrees will be measured.

FIGURE 25-1 Tubing Preferences

239Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Page 260: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Round Tubin

Measure TubeRound Tube

The MEASURE ROUND TUBE command links a series of plane, cylinder and torus commands to construct a single round tube. End B is the first feature to be measured and will be measured as a plane. End A is the last feature to be measured and is also measured as a plane.

Rectangular Tube

The MEASURE RECTANGULAR TUBE command links a series of plane commands together to construct a single rectangular tube.

Tube Fitting

The MEASURE TUBE FITTING command allows you to design a tube by measuring points in space to define the tube segments. A plane and cylinder at the ends of the tube is required. The plane and cylinder are used to determine the starting and ending points of the tube as well as the angle to the surface.

Construct TubeEnter XYZ

Round

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The XYZ values of the breakpoints, tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Enter PTB

Round

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube diameter and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

Rectangular

The Pull (y), Turn (B), Bend (C), tube width, tube height, and bend radius of the tube may be entered into a list to create a tube.

240g

Page 261: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

From Features

A tube may be constructed from measured, constructed, or nominal geometry. Two planes, a series of cylinders, and torids are selected to construct a tube.

Breakpoints

The breakpoints of a constructed or nominal tube may be added as separate features for use in alignment, construction, or dimension commands.

Importing Data

Import CSV

Select a comma-delimited file that contains the XYZ or PTB information for a tube. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, or XYZ value, bend radius and diameter information. The format for this command should be:

Tube diameter

01, X, Y, Z, 0, 0, 0, 0

02, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

03, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, Bend Radius

##, X, Y, Z, P, T, B, 0

NOTE: If the CONSTRUCT > TUBE > ENTER XYZ is used, only the X, Y, Z and Bend Radius information is needed. The PTB fields may be left blank. The X, Y, Z fields are not required for the ENTER PTB command.

Import BendPro™

Select a tube from the BendPro™ database. This command will populate the list with the Pull, Turn, Bend, Bend Radius and diameter information that was used to create the tube.

From Polyline

Select a polyline from the CAD view and the XYZ breakpoint list will be populated with the vertices of the polyline.

241Chapter 25: Round Tubing

Page 262: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 25: Round Tubin

Tube ReportingTube Correction Report

TubeBendCorrection is a report format specifically designed for calculating tube spring back. The Pull Turn Bend of the measured tube will be compared to the Pull Turn Bend of the nominal tube and a correction report will be generated. The correction report provides you with Pull Turn Bend information that will output a tube to match the nominal.

Important Topics - Round Tubing• The Tubing Preferences are based upon the settings of the tube

bending machine.

• The tubing bend radius may be measured for each bend or entered (default) for the tube. If a bend angle is 180 degrees, you must measure the bend as a torus.

• The tubing commands may be used in the Learn/Execute program to create part programs.

242g

Page 263: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Practical Exercise1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 26-2 Load Tolerances

243Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 264: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a

Measuring a Tube

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will step you through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands together.

3 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

• SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 26-3 Probes

• Take four or five points on the front of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-4 Measure Plane

244 Round Tube Practical

Page 265: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

7 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-5 Measure First Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-6 Measure Second Segment

245Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 266: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a

9 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

11 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-7 Measure Third Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-8 Measure Fourth Segment

246 Round Tube Practical

Page 267: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder.

15 ❑ Press the HOME key to cancel the cylinder measurment.

16 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-9 Measure Fifth Segment

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more segments to measure.

FIGURE 26-10 Last Segment?

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 26-11 Measure Plane

247Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 268: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

18 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the tube.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.

• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-12 Tube Bend Information

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Tube Measure-ment.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-13 Enter Header Information

248 Round Tube Practical

Page 269: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 26-14 Report List

• Filename = Tube Measurement.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 26-15 Save Report

249Chapter 26: Measuring a Round Tube Practical

Page 270: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 26: Measuring a

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

• File name = Tube Measurement.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 26-16 Save As

250 Round Tube Practical

Page 271: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Practical ExercisePreparing the Learn Execute file

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 27-2 Load Tolerances

251Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 272: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

2 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

3 ❑ You will see the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This shows you the instructions the program currently contains.

4 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn program.

Constructing a Nominal Tube

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT Menu, select TUBE > ENTER XYZ.

2 ❑ Enter the Tube type and Diameter.

• Select the ROUND toggle button.

• Diameter = 6.35.

• Select CAM2 Measure Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-3 Choose File type

FIGURE 27-4 Offline Programing Dialog

252ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 273: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the first point.

4 ❑ Click the ADD button.

5 ❑ Enter the second point.

6 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• X = 0.0.

• Y = 0.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 0.0.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-5 Enter Breakpoint

• X =25.0.

• Y = 0.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-6 Enter Breakpoint

253Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 274: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

7 ❑ Enter the third point.

8 ❑ Click the ADD button.

9 ❑ Enter the fourth point.

10 ❑ Click the ADD button.

• X = 100.0.

• Y = -27.5.

• Z = 12.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-7 Enter Breakpoint

• X = 100.0.

• Y = 282.5.

• Z = 12.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-8 Enter Breakpoint

254ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 275: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Enter the fifth point.

12 ❑ Click the ADD button.

13 ❑ Enter the last point.

14 ❑ Click the ADD button.

15 ❑ Select the NOMINAL radio button.

16 ❑ Click the OK button.

17 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the tube.

• X = 25.0.

• Y = 255.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-9 Enter Breakpoint

• X = 0.0.

• Y = 255.0.

• Z = 0.0.

• Bend Radius = 12.7.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

FIGURE 27-10 Enter Breakpoint

255Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 276: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

Construct Tube Points

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select TUBE > BREAKPOINTS.

2 ❑ Click OK to the 6 points created dialog.

Measuring a Tube

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select TUBE > ROUND TUBE.

Notice how CAM2 Measure steps through the measurement of a tube by linking the plane and cylinder commands.

• Tube = N_TUBE001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-11

• SMR = SMR of diameter 0.5 inch.

• Nest = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-12 Probes

256ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 277: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Measure End B of the tube as a plane.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

5 ❑ Measure the first segment of the tube as a cylinder.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 27-13 Measure Plane

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-14 Measure First Segment

257Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 278: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

7 ❑ Measure the second segment of the tube as a cylinder.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

9 ❑ Measure the third segment of the tube as a cylinder.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder results.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-15 Measure Second Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-16 Measure Third Segment

258ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 279: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Measure the fourth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

13 ❑ Measure the fifth segment of the tube as a cylinder.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-17 Measure Fourth Segment

• Take nine to twelve points around the cyl-inder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move away from the surface of the cylinder and press the HOME key for compensation.

FIGURE 27-18 Measure Fifth Segment

259Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 280: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

There are no more segments to measure, but CAM2 continues to prompt for a cylinder.

15 ❑ Press the Back button to tell CAM2 you are finished measuring.

16 ❑ Measure End A of the tube as a plane.

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

18 ❑ The Tube diameter and Bend Radius information is displayed.

• Press the <BACK> == NO button to confirm that there are no more seg-ments to measure.

FIGURE 27-19 Last Segment?

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 27-20 Measure Plane

• Tube Diameter = 6.35.

• Bend Radius = Fixed 12.70.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-21 Tube Bend Information

260ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 281: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

19 ❑ Select the NOMINALS tab.

20 ❑ Press the OK button to accept the tube.

Tube Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

2 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP1.

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001.

FIGURE 27-22 Tube Results

• Primary Point = C_TUBE001-BP1.

• Secondary Point = C_TUBE001-BP2.

• Tertiary Point = C_TUBE001-BP6.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-23 Feature Alignment

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP1.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-24 Nominal Breakpoint

261Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 282: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

3 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP2.

4 ❑ Select the nominal for C_TUBE001-BP6.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Printing a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP2.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-25 Nominal Breakpoint

• Select Nominal = N_TUBE001-BP6.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-26 Nominal Breakpoint

262ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 283: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Tube Program.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-27 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 27-28 Report List

263Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 284: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 27: Creating a R

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.

1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button.

• Filename = Tube Program.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 27-29 Save Report

FIGURE 27-30 Offline Learn/Execute

264ound Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 285: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Tube Program.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 27-31 Saving the Learn/Execute

265Chapter 27: Creating a Round Tube Learn/Execute Practical

Page 286: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 287: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 28: Tool Building• Objective - The instructor will introduce techniques that

may be used to position parts into an assembly. Upon completion of this section, the student will be able to position parts using the DRO Window.

Tool BuildingThis section deals with building an assembly with known data. These techniques are used to find the high or low surface or out of round locations for a circle, cylinder or sphere.

DRO Window

The DRO window may be assigned to a measured, constructed, or nominal feature. The DRO window will display the deviation between the SMR to the selected feature. The color is based upon the feature tolerance (nominal tolerances will be based upon the feature default). A green value is in tolerance. A yellow value is in tolerance, but above 75% of the tolerance value. A red value is out of tolerance. The DRO Window on a feature will be compensated for the SMR. The DRO Window command is found in Review Features. The window may be modified by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Dynamic DRO Window

The Dynamic DRO Window will automatically switch between point and surface features. The DRO window may be modified for Points or Surfaces by clicking on the Windows icon and selecting Configure.

Important Topics - Tool Building• DRO Windows may be created to show the deviation of the

measurement device to the feature.

• The Dynamic DRO Window may be used on points and surfaces.

• Nominal Features will use the default part tolerance to display the green (in tolerance), yellow (tolerance warning) or red (out of tolerance) deviation colors.

267Chapter 28: Tool Building

Page 288: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 289: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Practical Exercise1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 29-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-1.00mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-2 Load Tolerances

FIGURE 29-3 FARO CAD Translator

269Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 290: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-4 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 29-3 FARO CAD Translator

270 Practical

Page 291: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Aligning to the CAD

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

FIGURE 29-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 29-6 Probes

271Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 292: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

3 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-7 Measure Sphere A

• Label = SPHERE_A.

FIGURE 29-8 Sphere Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-9 Results Nominal Tab

272 Practical

Page 293: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

8 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• X= -135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diam-eter = 12.0.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-10 Construct Sphere Enter Values

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-11 Measure Sphere B

• Label = SPHERE_B.

FIGURE 29-12 Sphere Results

273Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 294: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

10 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

11 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

12 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

13 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-13 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 135.0, Y = -50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-ter = 12.0.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-14 Construct Sphere Enter Values

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-15 Measure Sphere C

274 Practical

Page 295: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

14 ❑ Take a look at the results.

15 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

16 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Label = SPHERE_C.

FIGURE 29-16 Sphere Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 29-17 Results Nominal Tab

• X= -135.0, Y = 50.0, Z = 28.5, Diame-ter = 12.00.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 29-18 Construct Sphere Enter Values

275Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 296: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the sphere.

Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

2 ❑ The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may not be seen since the calculation should solve very quickly.

3 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

• Selected Choices = M_SPHERE_A, M_SPHERE_B, M_SPHERE_C.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 29-19 Iterative Alignment

• Take a look at the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in toler-ance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured spheres and its associated nominal.

FIGURE 29-20 Iterative Alignment Results

276 Practical

Page 297: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box is displayed.

Import Model

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• File name = Tool Building.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 29-21 Save As

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Bracket3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 29-22 FARO CAD Translator

277Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 298: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Bracket3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 29-23 Adding CAD Parts

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 29-24 Construct Circle

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 29-25 Circle Results

278 Practical

Page 299: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

NOTE: The DISTANCE value is based upon the location of the center of

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the surface trim edge. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

• Click the left mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points out of the part.

• Click the right mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 29-26 Construct Circle

• Label = CIRCLE002.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 29-27 Circle Results

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE001.

• Distance = 25.4.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 29-28 Move IJK

279Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 300: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

the SMR from the center of the circle.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT < MOVE IJK.

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 29-29 Point Results

• Select a Line = N_CIRCLE002.

• Distance = 25.4.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 29-30 Move IJK

• Label = POINT002.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 29-31 Point Results

280 Practical

Page 301: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a DRO window on a Nominal

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 1.

3 ❑ Add a DRO window for point 2.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

5 ❑ Reposition the DRO Windows so both can be seen easily.

Positioning the Bracket

1 ❑ Place the bracket on the surface plate so that the back of the plate faces towards cylinder G.

2 ❑ Insert the two screws, but do not tighten.

• Click on N_POINT001.

• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 29-32 Adding a DRO

• Click on N_POINT002.

• Click the DRO button.

FIGURE 29-33 Adding a DRO

FIGURE 29-34 DRO Windows

281Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 302: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

3 ❑ Place the 0.250 SHANK WITH 1INCH OFFSET nest on the 1.5 INCH SMR.

4 ❑ Place the SMR in the hole of circle 1.

5 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 1 DRO are green.

6 ❑ Tighten the screw closest to circle 1.

7 ❑ Place the SMR in the hole of circle 2.

8 ❑ Move the plate slowly until all the XYZ values in the POINT 2 DRO are green.

9 ❑ Verify that point 1 is still green by placing the SMR in the hole of circle 1.

10 ❑ Once both points read green, tighten both screws.

Recording the Tool Position

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < COMP OFF.

2 ❑ Measure Point 1.

• Place the SMR in the hole of circle 1. Press the INSERT key.

• Press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-35 Measure Point

282 Practical

Page 303: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

5 ❑ Measure Point 2.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = POINT001.

FIGURE 29-36 Point Results

• Place the SMR in the hole of circle 2. Press the INSERT key.

• press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-37 Measure Point

• Label = POINT002.

FIGURE 29-38 Point Results

283Chapter 29: Tool Building Practical

Page 304: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 29: Tool Building

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Repeat the command and measure more surface points.

• Move the SMR close to the part; the nearest sur-face will turn red.

• Press the INSERT key.

• Pull the probe away from the surface, press the HOME key.

FIGURE 29-39 Measuring a Inspect Surface Point

• The results displayed are the X,Y, Z, and the 3D deviation to the surface.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 29-40 Inspect Surface Point Results

284 Practical

Page 305: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

285Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions• OBJECTIVE: Understand how to apply GD&T (Geometric

Dimensioning and Tolerancing) to CAM2 features. After completing this section the student will be able to apply GD&T to part inspection.

Geometric Characteristics and Symbols

Form DimensionsForm dimensions are the simplest of the GD&T because the measurement is compared to 0.0 or perfect geometry. The Datum is the feature itself. CAM2 Measure X creates a form feature that uses the measured data from a plane, line, circle, or cylinder to calculate the out of tolerance value.

FLATNESS

STRAIGHTNESS

CIRCULARITY (ROUNDNESS)

CYLINDRICITY

PERPENDICULARITY

ANGULARITY

PARALLELISM

POSITION

CONCENTRICITY

M MAXIMUM MATERIAL CONDITION (MMC)

S REGARDLESS OF FEATURE SIZE (RFS)

ØDIAMETRICAL (CYLINDRICAL) TOLERANCE ZONEOR FEATURE

8.00 BASIC, OR EXACT, DIMENSION

A DATUM FEATURE SYMBOL

C1Ø.250 DATUM TARGET

Ø .020 A B C FEATURE CONTROL FRAME

Page 306: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

286Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

Orientation DimensionsOrientation dimensions define the gap or interference created when two surfaces are put together. These dimensions are only a little more complicated because they require a feature and a datum. The datum is considered and the value of the orientation dimension is over the length of the feature, or an entered value.

Parallelism

When two parallel planes come together, they are supposed to mate flush. If they are not parallel, when they come together, a gap is created. Parallelism is the gap. Parallelism can be used with any or reducible features.

Perpendicularity

Perpendicularity is intended to show the gap created by the features at a to the datum. Perpendicularity can be used with any or reducible

features.

Concentricity

This tells if a line reducible feature is on the same center-line as the datum. This is intended to see if a pin and a hole will mate without interference. If the pin is not concentric to a hole (i.e., the pin is angled too drastically) then the pin will with

the edges of the hole.

True Position DimensionsTrue Position is a fairly simple concept. The feature control frame appears to be complicated, but it’s not. Simply align to Datums A, B and C using a CAD = PART alignment and check the position.

Associate the proper in the RESULTS dialog box.

In the tab turn on MMC or RFS depending on

Parallelism

Feature

Datum

Perpendicularity

Datum

Feature

x 2 = Concentricity

Feature

Datum

Page 307: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

287Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

which one is indicated. Change the RFS or MMC tolerance to the value indicated in the control frame. Multiple datum schemes require multiple alignments.

RFS (Regardless of Feature Size)

This condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature - Regardless of the Feature Size. The size is generally the diameter of a circle.

Since this is a 2D value, the nominal point is projected to the measured plane of the circle before the distance is calculated. The 2D distance between the center of the Nominal Circle to the Measured Circle times two (2) is the RFS and MMC.

MMC (Maximum Material Condition)

Another condition of True Position tolerance is the tolerance specified for the position of a feature using the Maximum Material Condition. The positional tolerance changes according to the measured size of the feature.

For a hole, the diameter at the lower end of the tolerance band (as small as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. For a pin, the diameter at the upper end of the tolerance band (as big as it should get) is the value used for MMC calculation. If the size of the feature is not at the maximum material condition, the difference between the actual size and the maximum material condition is added as a bonus to the positional tolerance.

• As the hole gets bigger, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the hole is out of tolerance, a pin inserted in the hole would have some room to fit.

• As the pin gets smaller, the positional tolerance increases. This means that even if the center of the pin is out of tolerance, the pin would fit into the hole.

Tol.

Zone

½ RFS or MMC

Nom

inal

Measured

Bonus Tol.

NOMINAL

Outer Tolerance

Inner Tolerance

Tol. Zone

ACTUAL

Page 308: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

288Chapter 30: Advanced Dimensions

For example:

The MMC tolerance on a hole is 0.50, the nominal diameter is 20.0 ± 0.10. If the hole is at its smallest (Maximum Material Condition), the stated MMC tolerance applies. The larger the hole, the more tolerance is allowed until the upper tolerance limit of the hole is reached (Least Material Condition).

If MMC is not specified, RFS is implied.

RFS and MMC are set in the TOLERANCE tab for the feature. Access the TOLERANCE tab of a feature through the RESULTS or REVIEW FEATURES dialog box.

Important Topics - Advanced Dimensions• If MMC is not specified on the print, RFS tolerance can be assumed.

• When measuring to true position tolerances, the alignment in CAM2 Measure X must be based on the drawing datums.

• The CAM2 Measure X software stores the tolerance information with each feature individually. All the control frame information (diameter, tolerances, true position information, roundness, etc.) is assigned to the feature.

Diameter: 20.0 ± 0.10MMC Tolerance: 0.50

Feature Size Positional Tolerance19.90 0.50 This is MMC19.95 0.5520.00 0.6020.05 0.6520.10 0.70 This is LMC

Page 309: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

289Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Practical ExerciseUse a drawing and a CAD file for nominal information. Construct nominal features from the CAD model, construct a nominal coordinate system, measure alignment features and construct a measured coordinate system, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, create advance dimensions, create and save an inspection report, and save the measurement file of your work.

Check the part following the dimensions on this drawing. Start by locating the Datum Feature Symbols.

FIGURE 31-1 FARO Demonstration Part

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

Page 310: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

290Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 31-3 Load Tolerances

Page 311: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

291Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 31-4 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 31-5 Adding CAD Parts

Page 312: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

292Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Constructing Nominals

In this exercise, we will introduce the method for creating a Nominal Coordinate system. If the imported CAD file contains a coordinate system that is located off the part, it is usually difficult to create a measured coordinate system to match it. If that is the case, a nominal coordinate system may be created on the CAD model using the CAD features. Next, those features of the part will be measured, and a measured coordinate system will be constructed. For a proper alignment, the Nominal Coordinate system created will then be associated to the Constructed Coordinate System using the CAD=PART alignment command.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

FIGURE 31-6 FARO_Demo_Part3 CAD file

• CAM2 Measure X will create a plane with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 31-7 Construct XY Plane

Page 313: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

293Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line.

• Click the LEFT mouse button to switch the vector so that it points up.

• Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 31-8 Choose Direction Vector

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-9 Nominal Plane Results

• CAM2 Measure X will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 31-10 Construct X Axis

Page 314: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

294Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-11 Nominal Line Results

• CAM2 Measure X will create a circle with 3 points.

• Left mouse click a point on the edge of the top surface. Watch the OUTPUT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 31-12 Construct Circle 9

• Label = CIRCLE_9.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-13 Circle Results

Page 315: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

295Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Creating a Nominal Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

Measure the Datum Features

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = N_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE_9.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-14 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-15 Probes

Page 316: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

296Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-16 Measure XY Plane

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Datum = A.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-17 Plane Results

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-18 Probes

Page 317: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

297Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

8 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

NOTE: After you accept the results of each measurement, an on-screen label adds to the CAD screen. Press the L hot key to automatically arrange these on-screen labels.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-19 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-20 Measure X Axis

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Datum = B.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-21 Line Results

Page 318: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

298Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

10 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

11 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

12 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-22 Probes

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-23 Measure Cylinder 9

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Datum = C.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-24 Cylinder Results

Page 319: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

299Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Constructing the Measured Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the point.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system results.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-25 Construct Point Line/Feature

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = C_POINT001.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-26 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-27 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 320: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

300Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment results.

FIGURE 31-28 Aligned to CAD

Page 321: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

301Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Form Dimensions

With an alignment between the measured features and nominal features continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-29 Flatness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-30 Straightness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = A.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-31 Perpendicularity

Page 322: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

302Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured; however, it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = C.

• Select a Feature = Measure as Cylinder.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-32 Concentricity

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylinder by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-33 Measure Cylinder10

• Label = CYLINDER010.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 31-34 Cylinder Results

Page 323: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

303Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Position Dimensions

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

4 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

A nominal circle from the CAD model is automatically associated to the measured circle because it is near the measured circle.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 31-35 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-36 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 31-37 Measure Circle 1

Page 324: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

304Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

5 ❑ Click the TOLERANCES tab.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This updates the circle tolerances for this file, and all the future circles will have these tolerance values.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

8 ❑ Measure will continue to measue circles until the command is canceled.

Printing and Saving a Text Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

• X = unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 31-38 Set Tolerances

• Continue measuring all eight circles in the pattern (2-8).

FIGURE 31-39 Measure Circles 2 -8

Page 325: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

305Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-40 Enter Header Information

Page 326: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

306Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Header = Header

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 31-41 Report List

• Filename = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 31-42 Save Report

Page 327: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

307Chapter 31: Advanced Dimensions Practical

Save The Measurements

9 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

10 ❑ The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Advanced Dimensioning.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 31-43 Save As

Page 328: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 329: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

309Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning

Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning

• Objective - The instructor will present how the scanning functions of CAM2 Measure X can be used to obtain geometric and non-geometric curves. After this section, the student will be able to collect data for use in CAM2 Measure X and other CAD systems.

What is Scanning?Scanning data can be saved as points, polylines, or splines. Data will typically be saved as , which are easier to work with than points or splines.

Scanned data is always uncompensated, which means the data is always taken at the center of the SMR. To compensate for the probe radius, create a surface and then that surface by the radius.

Why Scan?Scanning is generally useful if the part is not comprised of basic geometric (or prismatic) features. The general intent behind scanning is to generate curves that will eventually be used to create surfaces.

Scanning OptionsThe scanning option used depends upon the shape of the part being measured. Certain geometric shapes lend themselves to parallel cross sections; others lend themselves more to radial or normal lock planes.

FIGURE 32-1 Scanning Techniques

Parallel Cylindrical Normal

Page 330: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

310Chapter 32: Introduction to Scanning

Freehand Scan

Use the Freehand scan to trace a profile. CAM2 Measure X allows you to set the distance between the points.As the SMR passes through the minimum distance, it grabs the next point.

Lock Planes

The Lock Plane options is used to data onto predefined cross sections. CAM2 Measure X allows Locked Planes that are parallel to a plane, radial about a specified axis, or normal to a polyline.

• Parallel Lock Planes: Select the plane from which the cross sections are parallel, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), the distance between the planes, and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved.

• Radial Lock Planes: Select a line from which the cross section planes will emanate, the number of planes (from 1 to 1000), and the minimum distance between any two points on one cross section. If the points are closer than the minimum distance, CAM2 Measure X will drop points until the minimum distance is achieved.

• Normal Lock Planes: Select a polyline. The planes are automatically generated at the points along the polyline.

Editing Scan data

Editing the scan data is a little different than editing 2D and 3D features. Since scan data is not a feature, you can not use the EDIT button in the REVIEW FEATURES command. CAM2 Measure X has specific ADD and REMOVE POINTS commands for data created with the commands in the SCAN menu.

Use the EDIT < DELETE command to completely remove scan data.

Important Topics - Introduction to Scanning• To use the Normal Locked Plane command, a polyline must be

selected. The polyline is typically created using the Freehand Scan.

• The Add or Remove Points command works with Polylines. The commands do not work with data saved as points or splines.

• Use the Edit > Delete command to delete points, polylines or splines.

Page 331: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

311Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Practical ExerciseUsing the assembled demo part, align to the part, and practice the scanning skills. Work in either inches or millimeters.

NOTE: The steps in this practical are written to use Millimeters as the Drawing Unit. If you wish to complete the practical in Inches, remember to convert any number that you are typing into a dialog box.

Set the alignment by measuring the datum features. In this case, the top face of the plate will be the XY plane and the edges of the plate will define the X-axis and origin, respectively.

FIGURE 33-1 FARO Demonstration Bracket

S1

S2

Page 332: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

312Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

Measuring and Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-2 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 33-3 Load Tolerances

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-4 Probes

Page 333: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

313Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-5 Measure XY Plane

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-6 Plane Results

• SMR = 0.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-7 Probes

Page 334: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

314Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

6 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

7 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

8 ❑ Measure the line.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-8 Select Plane

• Take the three or four points from the S1 end towards S2 by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-9 Measure Line 1

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-10 Line Results

S1

S2

Page 335: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

315Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

10 ❑ Continue with the command and measure a line.

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Now that you have enough features to define a coordinate system, construct a Line/Line Intersection coordinate system.

• Take the three or four points on the S1 edge by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-11 Measure Line 2

• Label = LINE002.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 33-12 Line Results

S1

S2

Page 336: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

316Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

12 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE/LINE.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

CAD=Part

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

Save the Measurements

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE001.

• Select a Line = M_LINE002.

• Click the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK to create the coordinate system.

FIGURE 33-13 Line/Line coordinate system

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 33-14 CAD=Part Alignment

• The SAVE AS dialog box appears.

• File name = Scanning.

• Save as type = CAM2 Measure X Document (*.fce).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 33-15 Save As

Page 337: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

317Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Scan Measurement Preference

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

3 ❑ Select SCAN MEASUREMENT.

4 ❑ Click OK.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 33-16 Probes

• Type of Scanning = Start/Pause Scan With Trigger.

• Maximum Distance = 100000000000.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

FIGURE 33-17 Feature Scanning

Page 338: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

318Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

Freehand Scanning (2D)

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN > FREEHAND.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

NOTE: The offset of 30 mm will create a plane parallel to the YZ plane at X = 30 mm. This will be at the edge of the curved surface.

3 ❑ Place the SMR on the upper part of the surface.

• Type = 2D Freehand.

• Chordal = unchecked.

• Minimum Distance = 2.0.

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-18 Freehand Scan

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 30.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-19 Select Plane

• Press the INSERT key to begin scanning.

• Move the SMR across the surface contour.

• Press the INSERT key to pause the scan.

• Press the HOME key to end the scan.

FIGURE 33-20 Measure the freehand scan

S1

S2

Page 339: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

319Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

Parallel Lock Planes

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SCAN < PARALLEL LOCK PLANES.

• To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key.

• To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-21 Keep Data?

FIGURE 33-22 Freehand Scan

• Increment = 10.0 (0.50 in).

• Number of Planes = 100.

• Minimum Distance = 0.5 (0.05 in).

• Save As = Open Polylines.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-23 Parallel Lock Plane Scan

Page 340: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

320Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

3 ❑ Scan the surface.

4 ❑ Save the scan data.

• Select a Plane = YZ_C_COORDSYS001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 33-24 Select Plane

• Press the INSERT key to begin scanning.

• Move the SMR across the surface contour.

• Press the INSERT key to pause the scan.

• Press the HOME key to end the scan.

FIGURE 33-25 Parallel Locked Scanning

• To keep the scan data, press the INSERT key.

• To discard the scan data, press the HOME key.

FIGURE 33-26 Keep Data?

S1

S2

Page 341: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

321Chapter 33: Introduction to Scanning Practical

FIGURE 33-27 Parallel Locked Planes

Page 342: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 343: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

323Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation

Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation

• Objective: The instructor will present how to use the Learn/Execute modes of CAM2 Measure X to increase the inspection process of repeat part inspection. After completing this section the student will be able to create Learn/Execute programs to automate steps of the measurement process.

Learn Mode

The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to a measurement process.

The LEARN mode stores measurements, constructions, dimensions, coordinate systems, measurement instructions and .The output of text and graphical reports can also be learned. Programs created in the LEARN mode can be run in EXECUTE mode.

There are two ways to create a Learn file, (with the

measurement device connected) and (with no measurement device connected).

Create Learn files for operators that may not be very familiar with CAM2 Measure X or the part. Adding to the Learn file allows the operators to read instructions before they measure each feature.

On-Line Learn

On-Line Learn is like a video camera recording all of the activities. Once a feature is measured, add measurement instructions, nominals, tolerances, etc. in the RESULTS dialog box.

Page 344: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

324Chapter 34: SoftCheck Tool Creation

Off-Line Learn

Off-Line Learn creates a program by selecting features from the available menus for storage in the Learn file. A measurement device does not need to be connected; the only requirement is nominal information.

Off-Line Learn is useful for creating measurement routines when the part is not available because the part does not need to be measured to make the program.

The Off-Line mode can also be used to edit the programs.

Execute ModeThe EXECUTE mode allows the operator (or end user) to run the preprogrammed routines created in LEARN mode. If operators are only going to run EXECUTE mode, they only require minimal training.

Important Topics - Measurement Automation

• There are two ways to create Learn Files: On-Line or Off-line.

• Every Learn command has a Comment parameter which stores the measurement instructions for the operator (or end user).

Page 345: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

325Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Practical ExerciseCreate a part program, on-line, using CAD data for nominals. Use a CAD file for nominal information, measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the Learn file, and run the Learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-2 Load Tolerances

Page 346: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

326Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 35-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 35-4 Adding CAD Parts

Page 347: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

327Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

8 ❑ If you do not see the entire CAD model in the drawing screen run the ZOOM ALL command. From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL.

Start Learning

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

FIGURE 35-5 FARO_Demo_Part4 CAD file

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-6 Choose File type

Page 348: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

328Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button at the top of the window. This will begin the On-Line Learn programing.

6 ❑ CAM2 Measure X will switch back to the graphics view. The Learn

toolbar automatically appears on the screen. It has with three buttons: LEARN VIEW, SAVE LEARN, and STOP ON-LINE LEARN.

FIGURE 35-7 Off-Line Programing Dialog

• LEARN VIEW records the current view in the program.

• SAVE LEARN opens the SAVE LEARN dialog box.

• STOP ON-LINE LEARN returns CAM2 Measure X to the LEARN/EXECUTE window. This allows you to save the program, make off-line changes, end the Learn Process, or resume On-Line Learning.

FIGURE 35-8 Learn Toolbar

Page 349: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

329Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Measure Alignment/Datum Features

Measure 4 circles in the bolt pattern for an Iterative/Best Fit Alignment. Measure the circles at the 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 35-9 Probes

• Measure the plane on the top of the plate. Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-10 Measure XY Plane

Page 350: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

330Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ Click the NOTES tab.

5 ❑ Enter some measurement instructions for the operator.

• Feature Notes: Use this to enter information about a feature for the Report.

NOTE: The Learn file will not store this information.

• Measurement Instructions: Use this to give instructions, or comments, to the operator as the Learn program is Executed.

• Highlight: This will highlight the selected nominal red when the Learn program is Executed.

FIGURE 35-11 Plane Results

FIGURE 35-12 Enter Measurement Instructions for the Operator

Page 351: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

331Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

6 ❑ Click the HIGHLIGHT button.

7 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

8 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

9 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Click the FROM SCREEN button.

• Select the CAD surface that is to be measured.

• Click OK to accept the results of the nominal surface.

• Right mouse click to return to the Highlight dialog box.

• Click OK to accept the highlight.

FIGURE 35-13 Highlight the CAD Surface

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 35-14 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-15 Select Plane

Page 352: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

332Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

11 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

13 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-16 Measure Circle 1

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 35-17 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 1.

FIGURE 35-18 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 1

Page 353: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

333Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

15 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

16 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

17 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

NOTE: Remember that CAM2 Measure X will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 1 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-19 Circle 1

• X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 35-20 Set Tolerances

Page 354: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

334Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

19 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

20 ❑ Take a look at the results.

21 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-21 Measure Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 35-22 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 35-23 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 3

Page 355: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

335Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

22 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

23 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

24 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

25 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

26 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 3 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-24 Circle 3

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-25 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 35-26 Circle Results

Page 356: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

336Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

27 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

28 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

29 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

30 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

31 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 5.

FIGURE 35-27 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 5

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 5 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-28 Circle 5

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 35-29 Measure Circle 7

Page 357: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

337Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

32 ❑ Take a look at the results.

33 ❑ Click on the NOTES tab.

34 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

35 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button.

36 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 35-30 Circle Results

• Measurement Instructions: Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure Circle 7.

FIGURE 35-31 Enter Measurement Instructions for Circle 7

• Using the left mouse button select Circle 7 on the CAD Model.

• Click OK to accept the nominal circle.

FIGURE 35-32 Circle 7

Page 358: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

338Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Creating an Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept alignment.

Constructions and Dimensions

Construct the Bolt Circle and check it to the CAD Model.

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK to create the Alignment.

FIGURE 35-33 Iterative Alignment

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-34 Construct Nominal Circle

Page 359: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

339Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed from the CAD circles. This will be the nominal for the part's Bolt Circle.

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 35-35 Circle Results

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-36 Construct Best Fit Circle

Page 360: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

340Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINAL tab.

Since this is a construction, in Execute CAM2 Measure X will complete this command automatically. No measurement instructions are required.

Check the angle of the circles in the pattern. They should be an evenly spaced 90° pattern around the center circle.

5 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

7 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button:

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

• Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 35-37 Bolt Circle Results

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-38 Dimension Angle Apex

• Angle = 90.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-39 Dimension Angle Nominal

Page 361: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

341Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Generating a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

NOTE: The default Header and Format for CAM2 Measure X is stored in Part Preferences. The default is Header and Tabular.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-40 Enter Header Information

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-41 Report List

Page 362: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

342Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

End Learn.

1 ❑ Click the STOP ON-LINE LEARN button. The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears and the on-line programming stops.

• Filename = Online Learn Execute.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 35-42 Save Report

FIGURE 35-43 Off-Line Learn/Execute

Page 363: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

343Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

Execute Mode

Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Online Learn Execute.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 35-44 Saving the Learn/Execute

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-45 Choose File type

Page 364: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

344Chapter 35: On-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window shows the list of programs.

5 ❑ Run through the measurements.

6 ❑ Constructions and Dimensions are executed automatically.

7 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

8 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Select ONLINE LEARN EXECUTE.

• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 35-46 Execute Only

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Online Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 35-47 Enter Header Information

• Press the HOME key to exit

FIGURE 35-48 Repeat the Program?

Page 365: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

345Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Practical ExerciseCreate a part program, off-line, using a drawing for nominals. Measure alignment features, complete an alignment, measure the remaining features, construct non-measurable features, add dimensions, create and save an inspection report, save the learn file, and run the learn file to measure the part.

Translating and Adding CAD

For this practical, start with a new file and load the correct part preferences.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 36-2 Load Tolerances

Page 366: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

346Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Start Learning

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE < LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X will not prompt you for this information if the port lock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ The LEARN/EXECUTE window appears. This shows instructions the program currently contains.

Add Alignment/Datum Features

Construct a coordinate system based upon the datums, then measure the circles at 12, 3, 6 & 9 o'clock positions (Circles 1,3,5,7) around the bolt pattern.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-3 Choose File type

FIGURE 36-4 Off-Line Programing Dialog

Page 367: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

347Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES > SET CURRENT PROBE.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Click on the MEASURE PLANE command (line 10).

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

6 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 11). All new commands are always added above the selected line.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 36-5 Probes

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a plane. NOTE: This is the same as adding Measurement Instructions in On-Line learn.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-6 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-7 Change number of points for the feature

Page 368: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

348Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

7 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES > SET CURRENT PROBE.

8 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE > 2D LINE.

9 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

10 ❑ Click on the MEASURE LINE 2D command (line 13).

11 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 36-8 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-9 Select Plane

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a line.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-10 Enter a Comment for the Operator

Page 369: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

349Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

13 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 14).

14 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

15 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

16 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 14).

17 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-11 Change number of points for the feature

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-12 Select Plane

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure a circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-13 Enter a Comment for the Operator

Page 370: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

350Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

18 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

19 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE009.

20 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

21 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

22 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 9.

23 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-14 Change number of points for the feature

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-15 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 371: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

351Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

24 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

25 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

• X= unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked 0.25, -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 36-16 Results Tolerance Tab

Page 372: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

352Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Adding an Alignment

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 16).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-2-1.

3 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_CIRCLE009.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-17 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-18 CAD=Part Alignment

Page 373: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

353Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Measuring Features

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 18).

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

4 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 18).

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-19 Select Plane

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-20 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-21 Change number of points for the feature

Page 374: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

354Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

7 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

8 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

9 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

10 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 1.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-22 Construct Circle Enter Values

Page 375: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

355Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

13 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

15 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 20).

16 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

18 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 20).

• X= unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.00.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 36-23 Results Tolerance Tab

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-24 Select Plane

Page 376: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

356Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

19 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

20 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

21 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE003.

22 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

23 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-25 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-26 Change number of points for the feature

Page 377: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

357Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

24 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 3.

25 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

26 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 22).

27 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

28 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

29 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 22).

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-27 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-28 Select Plane

Page 378: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

358Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

30 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

31 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

32 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE005.

33 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

34 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-29 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-30 Change number of points for the feature

Page 379: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

359Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

35 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 5.

36 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

37 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 24).

38 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

39 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

40 ❑ Click on the MEASURE CIRCLE command (line 24).

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-31 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-32 Select Plane

Page 380: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

360Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

41 ❑ Double left mouse click on the COMMENT parameter.

42 ❑ Double left mouse click on the POINTS ON FEATURE parameter.

43 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = CIRCLE007.

44 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

45 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

• Enter some text to instruct the operator to measure the circle.

• Click OK to accept the comment.

FIGURE 36-33 Enter a Comment for the Operator

• Feature = 4.

• Click OK to accept.

FIGURE 36-34 Change number of points for the feature

Page 381: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

361Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

46 ❑ Enter the Nominal information of circle 7.

47 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

Adding Constructions and Dimensions

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 26).

2 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

3 ❑ Click on the CONSTRUCT CIRCLE BEST FIT command (line 26).

NOTE: Remember that Alignments, Constructions, and Dimensions automatically solve in Execute without any operator action. So, adding Comments, or Measurement Instructions, is generally not done for these feature types.

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE005, M_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = M_PLANE001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-36 Construct Best Fit Circle

Page 382: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

362Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

4 ❑ Change the label of the circle in the box at the top right side of the screen.

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

5 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

6 ❑ Click on the KEY IN button.

7 ❑ Enter the Nominal information for the bolt circle.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

9 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES button.

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 140.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 36-37 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X= checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 36-38 Results Tolerance Tab

Page 383: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

363Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the tolerances.

11 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 28).

12 ❑ From the DIMENSION menu, select ANGLE > APEX.

13 ❑ Click on the DIMENSION ANGLE APEX command (line 28).

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS button.

15 ❑ Click the KEY-IN button.

16 ❑ Enter the following value:

17 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the dimension.

Generating a Report

1 ❑ Click on the REPEAT EXECUTE command (line 30).

2 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > TEXT REPORT.

• Select 1st point = M_CIRCLE003.

• Select 2nd point = M_CIRCLE001.

• Select Apex = C_BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-39 Dimension Angle Apex

• Angle = 90.

• Choose the NOMINAL radio button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-40 Dimension Angle Nominal

Page 384: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

364Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

3 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

4 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

5 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

6 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

• Header = Header.

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked.

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features that are “On” the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF column. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-41 Report List

• Filename = Offline Learn Execute.

• Save as type = MHTML Files (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 36-42 Save Report

Page 385: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

365Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

End Learn

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

FIGURE 36-43 Off-Line Learn/Execute

• Creator = your name.

• Part Name = Offline Learn Execute.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 36-44 Saving the Learn/Execute

Page 386: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

366Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

Execute Mode

Run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ Run through the measurements.

5 ❑ Measure a plane on the top surface of the part.

• Select CAM2 Measure X Learn File (*.xln).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-45 Choose File type

• Select OFFLINE LEARN EXECUTE.

• Click the EXECUTE button.

FIGURE 36-46 Execute Only

• Take four points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-47 Measure XY Plane

Page 387: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

367Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

6 ❑ Measure line 1.

7 ❑ Measure circle 9.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the coordinate system and alignment.

8 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

• Take four points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-48 Measure X Axis

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-49 Measure Circle 9

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-50 Measure Circle 1

Page 388: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

368Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

9 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

10 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

11 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure X automatically constructs the bolt circle and angle dimension.

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-51 Measure Circle 3

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-52 Measure Circle 5

• Take four points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 36-53 Measure Circle 7

Page 389: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

369Chapter 36: Off-Line Measurement Automation Practical

12 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

13 ❑ Repeat Execute?

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Offline Learn Execute.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0002.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 36-54 Enter Header Information

• Press the HOME key to exit

FIGURE 36-55 Repeat the Program?

Page 390: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 391: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section, the student will apply the previous lessons and create a SoftCheck Tool for other ControlStation operators.

Learn Mode

The LEARN mode creates measurement routines or part programs to a measurement process.

Some of the information stored in a learn command, such as nominals and tolerances, will be familiar. Commands such as target points, highlighted features, and comments are only available in Learn/Execute mode. These are the visual aids to help the operator measure a part.

• Target Points: CAM2 Measure X records the position of the probe for each digitized point as features are measured. The operator will see each point to digitize in the CAD view.

• Highlighted Features: Nominal features may be turned a different color in the CAD view to help the operator determine the correct feature to measure. All nominals assigned to a measured feature will be highlighted automatically.

NOTE: CAD view is not seen when running a SoftCheck Tool.

• Comments: The operator receives instructions in a text window before measuring a feature. This is a good command to use to explain important details about the part.

SoftCheck tools have a comment for each digitized point, including the compensation point. The comment is a combination of a picture or video, and text.

371Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

Page 392: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 37: Measureme

Online or Offline?

There are different approaches to creating a measurement routine. Some information is easier to create in Online mode, and other information is easier to create in Offline mode.The table below shows which commands are easier in Online and Offline mode.

Execute ModeThe EXECUTE mode allows the operator to run the finished program. If the operator makes a mistake while measuring and cancels the command, the Learn/Execute program will prompt the operator with the Fail Mode setting in the program:

• Re-measure or Re-start (default): This option will re-measure the last feature, quit, or re-start the program.

• Re-start with Notification: This option will quit or re-start the program.

• Re-start or Backup: This option allows the operator to back up to a previous command in the program, quit, or re-start the program.

Display Results

After each measurement or construction, the results are displayed. The Learn Execute mode of CAM2 Measure has the ability to display the results (On), never display the results (Off), or only display the results when a feature is out of tolerance (Only Out of Tolerance). Each Feature in the program has a DISPLAY OPTIONS parameter.

Online OfflineTarget Points CommentsMeasure Template command Adding Nominals (without CAD)Auto Nominal Association (with CAD) Setting TolerancesSetting Views Changing Feature Label NamesAlignments Copy and Pasting groups of

commandsSelecting similar commands for editing as a group

372nt Automation

Page 393: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Important Topics - Measurement Automation

• Learn files may be created in Online or Offline mode. Offline mode is used to edit a Learn/Execute file.

• Comments may be used to input user instructions

• There are three fail mode options: Re-measure or Re-start, Re-start with Notification, and Re-start or Backup.

373Chapter 37: Measurement Automation

Page 394: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 395: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Practical Exercise

Selecting Units and Default Tolerances

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-1 Drawing Units

B

B

3 12

A

B

1

C

D

03FRM049-REV 1

B

5 4

5 4 3 2

A

C

D

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

15[.591]

[1.181]30

15[.591]

15[.591]

8X 20 [0.798]EQ. SP. ON A

140 [5.512] BC

25[.984]

+0.25-0.10

Ø 1.0 M A B C

A.50

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

25[.984]

100[3.94]

15[.591]

65[2.559]

170[6.693]

4X 5[.197]

50[1.969]

50[1.969]

30[1.181]

C60[2.362]

.50 A

.50

15°

160[6.299]

15[.591]

25[.984]

255[10.04]

20[.787]

40[1.575]

150[5.906]C

265[10.433]

300[11.811]

240[9.449]

65[2.559]

130[5.118]

167[6.575]

15[.591]

15[.591]

50[1.969]

20[.787] 20

[.787]

50[1.969]

65[2.56]

B.50 .50 B

20[.787]

SECTION B-B

375Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 396: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

Start Programming

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are creating.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

• Choose the Metric-0.50mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 38-2 Load Tolerances

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-3 Choose File type

376nt Automation Practical

Page 397: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ CAM2 Measure is now in OFFLINE mode.

5 ❑ Click the START ON-LINE LEARN button.

Measure the Datum Features

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

FIGURE 38-4 Offline Learn

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-5 Probes

377Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 398: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

3 ❑ Measure the plane on the top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-6 Measure XY Plane

• Label = DATUM_A.

• Datum = A.

FIGURE 38-7 Results

378nt Automation Practical

Page 399: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

8 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

9 ❑ Measure Datum B as a line.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 off-set.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-8 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-9 Select Plane

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-10 Measure X Axis

379Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 400: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the line.

12 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

13 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CYLINDER.

14 ❑ Measure Datum C as a cylinder.

• Label = DATUM_B.

• Datum = B.

FIGURE 38-11 Line Results

• SMR = 0.5 Inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-12 Probes

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylin-der by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-13 Measure Cylinder 9

380nt Automation Practical

Page 401: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

Constructing the Measured Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select POINT > LINE/FEATURE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the results.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-

• Label = DATUM_C.

• Datum = C.

FIGURE 38-14 Cylinder Results

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Select a Line = M_DATUM_C.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-15 Construct Point Line/Feature

381Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 402: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

2-1.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD=PART.

Form Dimensions

An alignment between the measured features and the nominal features has

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_DATUM_B.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = C_POINT001.

• Choose the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-16 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Nominal Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Scale Option = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-17 CAD=Part Alignment

382nt Automation Practical

Page 403: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

been completed, continue with the GD&T form dimensions.

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select FLATNESS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the flatness.

3 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select STRAIGHTNESS.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the straightness.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_A.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-18 Flatness

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_B.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-19 Straightness

383Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 404: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

384

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select PERPENDICULARITY.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the perpendicularity.

Dimension the concentricity between two bores on the plate. The second bore has not been measured, however; it is possible to measure inside a GD&T command.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select CONCENTRICITY.

8 ❑ Measure the cylinder 10.

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = A.

• Select a Feature = M_DATUM_C.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-20 Perpendicularity

• Tolerance = 0.50.

• Datum = C.

• Select a Feature = Measure as Cyl-inder.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-21 Concentricity

• Take nine to twelve points around the cylin-der by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the cylinder and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-22 Measure Cylinder10

nt Automation Practical

Page 405: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the cylinder.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the concentricity.

Position Dimensions

After identifying X, Y, Z on the print, the following hole location data may be determined:

Measure circles 1, 3, 5, and 7 in the bolt circle, starting with Circle 1 as indicated on the reference drawing of the demo part.

• Label = CYLINDER010.

FIGURE 38-23 Cylinder Results

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 1 0.00 mm 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 3 70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 5 0.00 mm -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

Circle 7 -70.00 mm 0.00 mm 0.00 mm 20.00 mm

385Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 406: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

3 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 off-set.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 38-24 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-25 Select Plane

386nt Automation Practical

Page 407: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab in the top of the RESULTS box.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-26 Measure Circle 1

• Label = CIRCLE001_I.

FIGURE 38-27 Circle Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-28 Results Nominal Tab

387Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 408: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

7 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

8 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

9 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will save the tolerance information for the next circle.

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 38-29 Construct Circle Enter Values

• X = unchecked.

• Y = unchecked.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 38-30 Set Tolerances

388nt Automation Practical

Page 409: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click on the REPORT tab and see the deviations between the measured and nominal.

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Measure will continue to measure circles until the command is canceled.

12 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

FIGURE 38-31 Tabular Results

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-32 Measure Circle 3

389Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 410: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

14 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

15 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

• Label = CIRCLE003_I.

FIGURE 38-33 Circle Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-34 Results Nominal Tab

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 38-35 Construct Circle Enter Values

390nt Automation Practical

Page 411: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 5.

18 ❑ Take a look at the results.

19 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-36 Measure Circle 5

• Label = CIRCLE005_I.

FIGURE 38-37 Circle Results

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-38 Results Nominal Tab

391Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 412: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

20 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

22 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

23 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• X= 0.0, Y = -70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 38-39 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 38-40 Measure Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007_I.

FIGURE 38-41 Circle Results

392nt Automation Practical

Page 413: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

24 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

25 ❑ Enter the nominal information.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Click on the KEY IN button.

FIGURE 38-42 Results Nominal Tab

• X= -70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 38-43 Construct Circle Enter Values

393Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 414: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

Bolt Circle

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

The nominal Bolt Circle has been constructed using the CAD circles. This will be our nominal for the measured Bolt Circle.

• Selected Choices = N_CIRCLE001, N_CIRCLE003, N_CIRCLE005, N_CIRCLE007.

• Select a Plane = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-44 Construct Nominal Circle

• Label = BOLT_CIRCLE.

• Click OK to accept the circle.

FIGURE 38-45 Circle Results

394nt Automation Practical

Page 415: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE > BEST FIT.

4 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE005_I, M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Select a Plane = M_DATUM_A.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-46 Construct Best Fit Circle

• Select Nominal = N_BOLT_CIRCLE.

FIGURE 38-47 Bolt Circle Results

395Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 416: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

5 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCES tab.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

Position Dimensions

1 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

• X = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Y = checked. Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.25.

• Z = unchecked.

• Diameter = checked, Upper Tol = 0.25, Lower Tol = -0.10.

• MMC = unchecked.

• Form = unchecked.

• RMS = unchecked.

• Std Dev = unchecked.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 38-48 Set Tolerances

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-49 Position

396nt Automation Practical

Page 417: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click on the TOLERANCE tab.

3 ❑ Click the SAVE TO PREFERENCES button. This will update the position tolerances for this file and all the future position commands.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

5 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

7 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

• MMC = checked, Upper Tol = 1.0.

• RFS = unchecked.

FIGURE 38-50 Position Tolerances

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-51 Position

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE005_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-52 Position

397Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 418: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

9 ❑ From the GD&T menu, select POSITION.

10 ❑ Click OK to accept the position.

Printing a Report

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the PRINT button.

3 ❑ Enter the following information in the ENTER HEADER INFORMATION dialog box:

• MMC = 1.0.

• Select a Feature = M_CIRCLE007_I.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-53 Position

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Base Plate Training.

• Serial Number of the current part = 0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-54 Enter Header Information

398nt Automation Practical

Page 419: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ The REPORT LIST shows the list of features for the report.

5 ❑ The REPORT PREVIEW shows a preview of the report.

6 ❑ Click the SAVE button to create a file of the report.

7 ❑ Click OK to exit REPORT PREVIEW.

8 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Header = Header

• Format = Tabular.

• Picture = checked.

• Notes = unchecked.

• Auto Arrange Labels = checked

• Calibration Error = unchecked.

• Lists = *DEFAULT LIST*.

• All the features are On the report will have a check mark in the ON/OFF col-umn. To add or remove features from the report, click the check box to the left of the feature.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-55 Report List

• Filename = Base Plate Train-ing.

• Save as type = MHTML File (*.mht).

• Click the SAVE button.

FIGURE 38-56 Save Report

399Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 420: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

Modifying and Saving Your Learn file

1 ❑ Click the STOP ONLINE LEARN button. This places you back in the LEARN/EXECUTE window and ends the programming.

2 ❑ Left mouse click on the PRINT GRAPHICAL TEXT command. You may have to scroll down the window on left side of the screen to see this command. It should be the second from the bottom of the list.

3 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

FIGURE 38-57 Offline Learn/Execute

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-log.

• Allow user to change all user fields = checked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial number = checked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = checked.

• Serial Number template = checked, SN####.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-58 Serial Number Template

400nt Automation Practical

Page 421: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on the MODE Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the PREVIEW Parameter in the window on the right side of the screen.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dialog.

• Mode = Automatic.

FIGURE 38-59 Save Mode

• Click OK in the FARO Prompt warning dia-log.

• Preview = On.

FIGURE 38-60 Preview

• Creator = Your Name.

• Part Name = Base Plate Training.

• Drawing Revision Number = A.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 38-61 Saving the Learn/Execute

401Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 422: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 38: Measureme

Execute Mode

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type that you are running.

4 ❑ From the LIST window, select Base Plate Training.

5 ❑ Click the EXECUTE button.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

7 ❑ Constructions and dimensions are executed automatically.

• Learn/Execute files = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-62 Choose File type

FIGURE 38-63 Select the Basic Measurements Program

402nt Automation Practical

Page 423: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ At the end of program, enter the operator and serial number.

9 ❑ Click OK in REPORT PREVIEW.

10 ❑ Click NO in SAVE CHANGES.

11 ❑ Click CANCEL in LEARN FILES.

• Operator’s Name: = Your Name.

• Name of the Part = Base Plate Training.

• Serial Number of the current part = SN0001.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 38-64 Enter Header Information

403Chapter 38: Measurement Automation Practical

Page 424: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 425: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image

Creator• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to use digital

pictures and a CAM2 Measure Learn Execute program to create a SoftCheck Tool. After completing this section the student will be able to create a SoftCheck Tool.

SoftCheck ToolsSoftCheck Tool is the term for enhanced Learn/Execute programs.

A typical Learn/Execute program takes an operator through the steps of a part program with instruction text prompts and CAD drawings.

A SoftCheck Tool incorporates digital pictures of the part and color-coded targets to make the more user friendly. Digital video (AVI) and digital audio (WAV) can also be used in a SoftCheck Tool.

Taking Pictures

Take pictures to show an operator exactly where to take the measurements. Take close-up shots of areas where detail is needed. Orient the camera in the same way that the operator will be looking at the part.

While taking pictures, include as many features in a shot without sacrificing space, picture clarity, and . Capturing a big cluster of features from far away will not provide enough detailed information for the operator. One picture can be used as many times as needed. The ideal image size is 640x480 pixels, most cameras have an adjustable setting for the size of a picture.

One picture of the entire part must be taken to use as an in SoftCheck Tool Manager.

405Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 426: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 39: Creating Dig

Image Creator

Each point during the execution of a program will require its own picture and target point. The picture must have a specific name and for the software to properly associate it with its corresponding measurement.

FARO’s Image Creator program makes the photo editing process faster and easier.

The Green Ball

A standard FARO SoftCheck Tool uses the image of a green sphere as a target. The color indicates that the SMR must make contact with the

surface and the INSERT key must be pressed. A sphere indicates where the HOME key must be pressed.

An image library will automatically load with Image Creator. The target balls will be dragged from the image library to the digital picture. There is a complete green ball, red ball, 24 partial balls, and a shadow in the image library.

3D Effects

The is used to give some depth to the red ball or compensation point. The shadow demonstrates that the ball is floating above a surface.

Independent Comments

Independent comments in the program can have pictures. The OFFLINE EDIT mode will prompt for the name of the picture file.

A comment at the beginning of each program to instruct the operator to follow the green ball and press the correct button will help the operator understand the concept of the green and red sphere. AVI and WAV files can be used in comments.

406ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 427: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Hot Keys for Image Creator

Important Topics - Creating Digital Pictures• A picture that shows the entire part should be taken for use as the

icon in SoftCheck Tool Manager.

• Take several close up pictures of the part that shows the features that are to be measured. This will help the operator to understand which features is to be measured.

• Icons must be created to use the Pack Tool command. The Pack Tool command is designed to create a single file to transport the SoftCheck Tool to another computer.

Keystroke Function

É Help

D Delete

N Enlarge

- Shrink

C+W Previous Frame

C+X Next Frame

A+W Rotate Counter-Clockwise

A+X Rotate Clockwise

S Select

407Chapter 39: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator

Page 428: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 429: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image

Creator Practical

Practical ExerciseTaking and Importing Images

1 ❑ Use the Digital Camera to take pictures of the part.

2 ❑ From the START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS < FARO < IMAGE CREATOR.

NOTE: The CAM2 Measure portlock must be enabled for SoftCheck Tools to use Image Creator.

NOTE: A part program must be created to use Image Creator. Copy the jpg files to the CAM2 MEASURE\LEARN\(PART NAME)\BASE IMAGES directory.

3 ❑ Select the BASE PLATE TRAINING.

Image Creator will prompt for the first base image.

4 ❑ Click the IMPORT button.

5 ❑ Navigate to the removable drive that contains the images.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-1 Open file

409Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 430: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: Creating Dig

6 ❑ Select the images.

7 ❑ Select an image.

The first measured feature on your program appears in the Tree View. The Point Number field is automatically set to Point 1.

Adding the Green/Red Balls

1 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select MOVE MODE. This allows the green/red balls to be dragged from the image library to the base image.

2 ❑ Click and drag the green target ball from the image library to the base image.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-2 Open Images

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-3 Select Image

FIGURE 40-4 Image Creator

410ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 431: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Re-size the green ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select ENLARGE. The ENLARGE command will increase the size of the ball.

• From the LAYER menu, select SHRINK. The SHRINK command will reduce the size of the ball.

4 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

NOTE: The NEXT button saves the location and size of the ball for the point. The image will get created with the SAVE JPGS command.

5 ❑ Move the ball to the next target location.

6 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

7 ❑ Repeat for all points.

8 ❑ When you get to the compensation point, the green ball will automatically turn into the red ball with a shadow.

9 ❑ Click and drag the image into position.

10 ❑ Rotate the image.

• From the EDIT menu, select ROTATE MODE. The ROTATE command will spin the ball.

• Click and hold the left mouse button on the base image. Scroll left to right to rotate the ball.

11 ❑ From the FRAME menu, select NEXT.

12 ❑ Repeat this section for all measured features.

13 ❑ Change the base image. From the FRAME menu, select CHANGE BASE IMAGE.

NOTE: The partial balls are used to give the three-dimensional illusion that the ball is behind an object. To indicate that a point should be taken inside or behind a feature, select the partial ball that best fits the situation.

NOTE: You are encouraged to do the pictures in the same order as the features in the program. This way, you take advantage of the auto increment feature in Image Creator.

411Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 432: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: Creating Dig

Creating Images, Icons and Reports

To run your programs in the SoftCheck Tool Manager, you need to make a couple of icons or buttons to start the program. Ideally, you will use one picture of the part to create these icons.

1 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SAVE JPEGS.

2 ❑ From the SCT menu, select SCTM ICONS.

3 ❑ Click the SET button for the BIG image.

4 ❑ Click OK.

5 ❑ From the SCT menu, select REPORT IMAGE.

6 ❑ Click the SET button.

7 ❑ Click OK.

Saving the Image List

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

This saves the image list as an Image Creator file (*.icp).

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

• Select the Base Image.

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-5 SCTM Icons

• Select the Base Image.

• Click SELECT.

FIGURE 40-6 Report Icons

412ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 433: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Preview the SoftCheck Tool in CAM2 Measure

You can also view the pictures without having to run the program.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

5 ❑ Highlight the MEASURE PLANE command.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 40-7 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Train-ing.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 40-8 Open SoftCheck Tool

413Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 434: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 40: Creating Dig

6 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PREVIEW COMMENTS.

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

8 ❑ Click YES to save changes.

9 ❑ If picutres need to be modified, use Image Creator, then return to CAM2 Measure to preview the comments.

Execute the SoftCheck Tool

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > EXECUTE ONLY.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

4 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN will cycle through the program by command.

• UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW will cycle through the program by point.

• The text com-ments can be edited while pre-viewing the pic-tures.

FIGURE 40-9 Preview Comments

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 40-10 Choose File type

414ital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 435: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

5 ❑ Select the program.

6 ❑ Run through all the measurements.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click EXECUTE.

FIGURE 40-11 Execute SoftCheck Tool

415Chapter 40: Creating Digital Pictures with FARO’s Image Creator Practical

Page 436: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 437: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate the capabilities of SoftCheck Tool Manager Program. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up Part and Operator preferences and navigate through SoftCheck Tool Manager.

Using the SoftCheck Tool ManagerThe SoftCheck Tool Manager (SCTM) is an HTML-based program that serves as a for SCTs (SoftCheck Tools).

SoftCheck Tool Manager has the look and feel of a web site with large buttons to navigate through the different options. The SoftCheck Tool Manager can be installed on the computer by selecting the CUSTOM install from the CAM2 Measure installation CD.

Navigating the SCTM

Main Screen

The Control Station touch screen computer opens to the main SCTM screen.

• Administrator: This area is designated for the person responsible for managing the Control Station.

• New Operator: New operators are prompted to select their assigned User ID and enter their personal password twice for verification to begin working for the first time. Once a password is entered, the operator can go directly to OPERATOR LOGIN screen.

• Operator Login: Operators are prompted to select their User ID and enter the password to begin working.

• Tool List: The large, green ball in the center of the screen takes the operator straight to the public SCT library.

• Log Off Operator: Logs off the current operator.

• CAM2 Measure: Launch CAM2 Measure.

• System Off: Shuts down the Control Station.

417Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Page 438: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck To

NOTE: If there is no administrator account set on the Control Station, all SCTs are considered public and all areas are available to anyone. An administrator has the rights to set operator accounts and assign or restrict their use of SCTs.

Tool List

In the Tool List you have series of picture icons/buttons that represent your SCTs. The NAMES button changes the large buttons to small buttons and full program names. To return to the large button screen touch the PICTURES button.

To start a program the picture.

TOOL KITS: The Tool Kits allow the operator to create programs using simple macros. The macros can be linked together to create a larger program.

Administrator

PREFERENCES, SHORTCUTS, TOOL MANAGEMENT, OPERATOR SETUP, DATA MANAGEMENT and BACKUP are found in the ADMINISTRATOR area.

PREFERENCES: Set default values for System Options, Tool Options and Operator Options.

• SYSTEM OPTIONS: Change the look of the program by setting the default screens when the machine is turned on. This also eliminates the number of different screen options or tool list modes displayed for an operator.

• PATHS: You can view and modify the system paths for the Control Station.

SHORTCUTS: In this area are shortcuts to Windows Explorer, Windows Notepad, CAM2 SPC Graph and the SoftCheck Tool web site.

TOOL MANAGEMENT: Manage the SoftCheck Tools on your Control Station.

• ADD FOLDER: Adds a folder to the SoftCheck Tool List.

• MOVE TO FOLDER: Moves the selected tool to a different folder.

• DELETE: Removes a SoftCheck Tool or folder from the computer.

418ol Manager

Page 439: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

• LOAD TOOL: Adds a SoftCheck Tool from a removable drive (CD, 1.44 diskette, Microdrive) or browse the drives for a Packed Tool.

• DOWNLOAD FROM WEB: Link to FARO’s Control Station website.

• PRINT TOOL LIST: Sends a file to the printer of a list of tools on the Control Station.

• SAVE TOOL LIST: Saves a file that has a list of tools on the Control Station.

• TOOL OPTIONS: Set access rights for SCTs by touching the underlined parameters.

• Archived Status: Current means that the program is available in the tool list. Archive removes the program form the tool list. (It can be made current at any time.)

• User ID Required: No makes the tool available to anyone. Yes requires an operator to be logged in to run the SCT.

• Serial Number Required: No does not prompt the operator to input a serial number. Yes requires an operator to input a serial number.

• Auto Serial Number: No does not auto increment serial num-bers. Yes auto increments serial numbers.

OPERATOR SETUP: Add operators and access their tool privileges.

• OPERATOR NAMES: Add, delete, or modify operators. Assign user IDs, initalize or modify passwords. The RESET PASSWORD box allows users to enter their own password the first time they log in to the system. They will have to log in as new user.

• OPERATOR OPTIONS: Set the Default Tool List Mode for each operator. (Pictures, Names or System)

• TOOL ACCESS: Assign tools to a registered operator.

DATA MANAGEMENT: View, archive, import, export and delete reports.

BACKUP: Backup and recover SoftCheck Tools and Data.

• PATH: Set the location of the backup file.

• BACKUP FREQUENCY: Set the time of day for automatic backup.

419Chapter 41: SoftCheck Tool Manager

Page 440: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 41: SoftCheck To

• RESTORE FROM BACKUP: Restores the Control Station from the Backup file.

Important Topics - SoftCheck Tool Manager• SoftCheck Tool Manager is the player for SoftCheck Tools.

• SoftCheck Tools that are played through SoftCheck Tool Manager do not require a portlock.

NOTE: The first time a program is run on a new computer a password must be entered to authorize the computer to run without a portlock. The password can be obtained from FARO’s customer service department.

• The report names are controlled by the serial number of the part. To enter a serial number for a part you must activate the SERIAL NUMBER REQUIRED or AUTO SERIAL NUMBER option in the TOOL MANAGEMENT > TOOL OPTIONS page.

• A SoftCheck Tool that does not have an icon will be displayed as a large green ball in the TOOL LIST.

420ol Manager

Page 441: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISETransferring SCTs to a New Computer

To transfer files from the Control Station to another computer, the PACK TOOL command will be used. This is available in the OFFLINE mode of LEARN EXECUTE in the TOOL BUILDER menu. The PACK TOOL command compresses all the files for a SoftCheck Tool into one file.

To transfer files from the programming computer:

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 42-1 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Training.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 42-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

421Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 442: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: SoftCheck To

5 ❑ From the TOOL BUILDER menu, select PACK TOOL.

6 ❑ Select the Image Files.

7 ❑ Click NEXT.

8 ❑ Select the Report Formats and Compression.

9 ❑ Click FINISH.

NOTE: The Base Plate Training.cab file is created and stored in the DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\ALL USERS\APPLICATION DATA\FARO directory.

10 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

11 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

12 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• SCT File = checked.

• JPG Images = checked.

• Tool Settings File = unchecked.

• SCT Image Files = Select All.

• SCT Base Image Files = Select All.

• SPC Graph Files = Select All.

FIGURE 42-3 Pack Tool 1

• Report Format Files = No.

• Spanning = No.

FIGURE 42-4 Pack Tool 2

• Click OK.

FIGURE 42-5 Creating CAB file

422ol Manager Practical

Page 443: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

SoftCheck Tool Setup

1 ❑ From START menu, select ALL PROGRAMS > FARO > SOFTCHECK TOOL MANAGER.

2 ❑ Click on the ADMINISTRATOR button.

• Administrator name = Administrator name.

• Password Entry = password.

3 ❑ Click LOGIN.

4 ❑ Click the TOOL MANAGEMENT button.

FIGURE 42-6 SoftCheck Tool Manager

FIGURE 42-7 Administrator

423Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 444: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 42: SoftCheck To

5 ❑ Click the TOOL OPTIONS button.

6 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING SoftCheck tool.

7 ❑ Click on the AUTO SERIAL NUMBER link to modify the serial number option for BASE PLATE TRAINING.

8 ❑ Click OK.

• Archive Status = Current.

• Operator Required = Yes.

• Serial Number Required = No.

• Auto Serial Num-ber = Yes.

FIGURE 42-8 Tool Options

• Auto Serial Num-ber = checked.

• Part Serial Num-ber = SN####.

• Next Serial Num-ber = 3.

• Next Part Serial = blank.

FIGURE 42-9 Auto Serial Number

424ol Manager Practical

Page 445: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

9 ❑ Click the TOOL LIST button.

10 ❑ Click the BASE PLATE TRAINING button.

11 ❑ Measure the part.

FIGURE 42-10 Tool List

425Chapter 42: SoftCheck Tool Manager Practical

Page 446: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 447: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will know how to interpret charts and set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC Graph to work together.

Saving Data to CAM2 SPC Graph

CAM2 SPC Graph requires two files to create a report. The is the picture or view file, the second is the measurement data.

NOTE: All data is exported to SPC GRAPH\(PART NAME) directory. The name of the Learn\Execute program is in a folder in the CAM2 SPC Graph directory.

Using Pictures from a Digital Camera

Digital pictures may be imported into CAM2 SPC Graph as an EMF or BMP. Most digital cameras store pictures in JPG (JPEG) format. Use an image editing program to the JPGs as EMF or BMP. Store the digital picture in the SPCGRAPH\(PART NAME) directory.

TIP: Save the picture in the same orientation that the part will be measured.

Chart Types

RUN CHART - A Run Chart plots the actual values of a measured feature over time. It tracks long-term and patterns to assist in determining when intervention is needed in a process by revealing unusual patterns in measurement.

RANGE CHART - A Range Chart calculates a value of a spread of numbers or data. The range is determined by subtracting the lowest number from the highest number in the group. The range variations are plotted over time. This shows the variations of a range of measurements in the process.

427Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Page 448: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 43: Advanced G

AVERAGE CHART - An Average Chart calculates the mean (average) of a group of numbers. The mean values are plotted over . This shows the variations of an average of measurements in the process.

CAM2 SPC Graph plots the nominal data, the measurement average, and the upper and lower control limits, which are automatically calculated based on the data. The Cp and the Cpk ratio is calculated and displayed on the bottom of the chart.

GROUP SIZE - The CHART, # IN EACH GROUP field specifies the number of measurements to merge. Each point on the Average Chart equals the average of the values in each group. Each group is organized sequentially by date.

Advanced Chart OptionsPROCESS CAPABILITY INDICES (Cp & Cpk) - At the bottom of the Preview window is the Process Capability (Cp) ratio. This compares the actual variation of the process with the requirements. It measures the precision and performance of the process, but not necessarily the accuracy. A Cp ratio of less than means that the process is not capable of meeting specifications because the variation is higher than the requirements.

While the Cp measures precision, it only indicates the potential of the process to meet the requirements. The Cpk ratio, also at the bottom of the PREVIEW window, measures accuracy and . The Cpk ratio takes into consideration the process variation, and how close it is to nominal. It is advantageous to refer not only to the Cp, but also to the Cpk ratio.

Every process is subject to classification based on capability and control. The four general cases that we may use to classify a process are illustrated in the following charts:

Case 1

Case 3 Case 4

Process VariationProcess Variation

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

Process VariationAverage

Case 2

Process Variation+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

Average

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

+Tol

Nominal

-Tol

AverageAverage

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk>1)Meeting Requirements = "Acceptable"

Process "in control" (Cp>1, Cpk<1)Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable" Process "not in control" (Cp<1, Cpk<1)

Meeting Requirements = "Not Acceptable"

428raphical Reporting

Page 449: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

429

• Case 1 represents a desirable scenario because the process is in control, meaning that it has variation within the established tolerance and the average measurements meet the required nominal values.

• Case 2 is not desired because even though the process variation is small keeping it in control, the average measurements are far from nominal, not meeting the requirements.

• Case 3 may be seen as desirable or not, depending on the customer’s concerns. Clearly, we see that the process varies more than the specification, but overall, it meets the average requirements.

• Case 4 is not desired because of excess process variation and deviation from nominal.

Important Topics - Advanced Graphical Reporting

• The Cp and Cpk values for a feature will be displayed on the bottom of the Range, Average and Run chart.

• The # in each group value will change the sample size for Range and Average charts.

• There must be more than 5 sets of data to create a chart.

Chapter 43: Advanced Graphical Reporting

Page 450: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 451: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

• OBJECTIVE - To learn to communicate measurement results effectively with Graphical Reporting. After completing this section, the student will be able to set up CAM2 Measure X and CAM2 SPC GRAPH to work together automatically.

PRACTICAL ExerciseModify the Learn/Execute Program

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select LEARN/EXECUTE > LEARN/EXECUTE.

2 ❑ Click NO when prompted to save changes.

3 ❑ Choose the file type.

NOTE: CAM2 Measure will not prompt the user for this information if the portlock is not authorized to write SoftCheck Tools.

4 ❑ From the FILE menu, select OPEN.

• Learn/Execute file = SoftCheck Tools (*.sct).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 44-1 Choose File type

• Click NO to save changes.

• Select Base Plate Train-ing.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 44-2 Open SoftCheck Tool

431Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 452: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced G

5 ❑ Left mouse click on END OF FILE to highlight the last command.

6 ❑ From the MISC menu, select EXPORT DATA < EXPORT DATA.

7 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

NOTE: Un-checking all the parameters will allow the report to use the same serial number of the Graphical Text Report.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

Creating Test Data for SPC Graph

1 ❑ From the TOOLBUILDER menu, select TEST DATA.

NOTE: This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

• Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-ber = unchecked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked.

• Serial Number template = unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 44-3 Auto Increment Serial number

• Click the YES button to open CAM2 SPC Graph.

FIGURE 44-4 Start SPC Graph

432raphical Reporting Practical

Page 453: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Creating a SPC Graph Template

1 ❑ SPC Graph displays the list of parts.

2 ❑ On the left side of the screen is the PARTS LIST window. Double left mouse click on BASE PLATE TRAINING.

• The PART window is added on top of the PARTS LIST window and displays a tree that contains the folders of measurement files and picture files.

• A Master Template is loaded into the canvas (right screen).

3 ❑ Click on the plus sign (+) next to MASTER TEMPLATES to display all templates.

FIGURE 44-5 SPC Graph

FIGURE 44-6 Training CAD to Part

433Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 454: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced G

4 ❑ Double left mouse click on COLOR TEMPLATE 3.AG2.

NOTE: Color Template 3 is the landscape format with the header at the top of the page.

5 ❑ Double left mouse click on the FAROSETUP.EMF file under the DRAWINGS list.

• The picture is now added to the canvas.

• Click and drag the picture around to place it on the canvas.

• Click and drag the corners of the picture to change the size.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the FAROSETUP1 measurement set under the MEASURMENTS folder.

FIGURE 44-7 Adding the View

• The measurement set expands and shows all the fea-tures in the measurement file.

FIGURE 44-8 Part List Tree

434raphical Reporting Practical

Page 455: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Adding Run Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Adding Range Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

X Y Z Dia Form MMC

C_FLATNESS001 X

C_PERPENDICULARITY001 X

C_STRAIGHTNESS001 X

C_CONCENTRICITY001 X

M_CIRCLE001 X

M_CIRCLE003 X

M_CIRCLE005 X

M_CIRCLE007 X

C_BOLT_CIRCLE X X X

C_POSITION001 X

C_POSITION003 X

C_POSITION005 X

C_POSITION007 X

• Chart Type = Run Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 44-9 Run Chart

435Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 456: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced G

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Adding Average Charts to the template

1 ❑ Click on any of the features in the Measurements part tree.

2 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select INSERT > CHART.

Align Icons

You may want to experiment with the ALIGN commands in the OBJECT MENU < ALIGN. These align tables/charts to the table/chart you select last. For example, if you wanted to align the centers of a series of tables in a vertical column, you would:

1 ❑ Hold the SHIFT key down and select the tables that should align to the same horizontal position.

2 ❑ Continue to hold down the SHIFT key and select the table that is at the correct position.

3 ❑ From the OBJECT menu, select ALIGN < ALIGN HORIZONTAL CENTERS.

• Chart Type = Range Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• # in Each Group = 2.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 44-10 Range Chart

• Chart Type = Average Chart.

• Feature/Parameter = see Table.

• # in Each Group = 2.

• Click the PREVIEW button to view the chart.

• Click OK to add the chart to the template.

FIGURE 44-11 Average Chart

436raphical Reporting Practical

Page 457: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Saving the Report

1 ❑ When you are finished arranging the tables and the CAD view on the canvas, save it as a report.

This is called a Part Template because you may use one part template for many measurement sessions.

2 ❑ Save the file.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT.

Adding a Preview to the Program

Return to CAM2 Measure Learn/Execute Offline Programing Dialog Box.

1 ❑ Click on GRAPHICAL TEXT REPORT.

2 ❑ From the EDIT menu, select DELETE.

• From the FILE menu, select SAVE AS.

• Select PART TEMPLATE.

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 44-12 Saving a Part Template

• File name = Page 1.

• Save as type = AG2Doc Files (*.ag2).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 44-13 Save As

437Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 458: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 44: Advanced G

3 ❑ From the MISC menu, select GRAPHICAL REPORTS > SAVE SPC GRAPH REPORT.

4 ❑ Name the temporary .jpg file.

NOTE: The .jpg file is a temporary file that CAM2 Measure creates in order to display the report.

5 ❑ Click on SAVE GRAPHICAL REPORT.

6 ❑ Double left mouse click on the AUTO INCREMENT Parameter.

• Part Name = Base Plate Training.

• Part Template = Page 1.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 44-14 Adding an SPC Graph report

• File name = Page 1.

• File of type = (*.jpg).

• Click SAVE.

FIGURE 44-15 Save JPG

• Allow user to change all user fields = unchecked.

• Allow user to change all standard fields = unchecked.

• Allow the operator to modify the serial num-ber = unchecked.

• Auto Increment Serial number = unchecked.

• Serial Number template = unchecked.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 44-16 Auto Increment

438raphical Reporting Practical

Page 459: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select SAVE.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select EXIT LEARN.

439Chapter 44: Advanced Graphical Reporting Practical

Page 460: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 461: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present feature reducibility and the differences between the coordinate systems. After completing this section, the student will be able to create coordinate systems with fewer constructions.

Feature ReducibilityFill in the chart below:

Plane Line Point

Arc

Circle

Cylinder

Cone

Ellipse

Line

441Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 462: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

3-2-1 TYPE Coordinate Systems

Each coordinate system levels the plane (XY, YZ or XZ), rotates the axis (X, Y or Z) and sets the origin. 3-2-1 means that three points define a plane that sets one axis, two points define a line that locks a second axis, and one point defines an origin.

There are factors that distinguish the eight different coordinate systems.

1 The selected features (plane, line or point).

2 How the features are used.

Plane

Point

Rectan-gular Slot

Round Slot

Sphere

Plane Line Point

442 Coordinate Systems

Page 463: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Coordinate Systems

Coordinate Systems using a Plane, Line, and Point in Different Ways

• The Coordinate System uses the point selected as the origin.

• The Coordinate System projects the point selected to the plane for the origin.

• The Coordinate System projects the point selected to the line selected for the origin.

FIGURE 45-1 3-2-1 Coordinate System

FIGURE 45-2 Separate Origin Coordinate System

FIGURE 45-3 Perpendicular Coordinate System

X

YZ

X

YZ

X

YZ

443Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 464: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

444

Coordinate Systems using a Plane and Two Lines

• The Coordinate System creates the origin from the intersection of the two lines. The first line defines the direction of the X-axis.

• The Coordinate System creates the origin from the intersection of the plane and the second line selected. Notice that the second line must intersect the plane at a single point and cannot lie on the plane.

Other Coordinate Systems using Different Features

• The Coordinate System uses the first plane selected as the XY plane, the second plane intersects the first to create the X-axis, and the third plane intersects the other two to create the origin.

FIGURE 45-4 Line/Line Coordinate System

FIGURE 45-5 Bore Coordinate System

FIGURE 45-6 3 Plane Coordinate System

X

YZ

X

YZ

X

YZ

1

3

2

Coordinate Systems

Page 465: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

• The __________ Coordinate System sets the origin at the first point, the +X-axis from the first point to the second, and the +XY plane on the third point.

• The Coordinate System sets the origin at the midpoint of the line selected.

Change Coordinate System Discussion

Rotation allows the coordinate system to spin about any axis or line. Use the hand rule to determine which rotation direction is positive. Point the thumb of your right hand along the positive axis or line direction. The direction your fingers wrap is the positive direction of rotation.

Translation allows you to move the coordinate system to a specific point in space, either from a previous coordinate system or to any other ____________ feature or along a line.

FIGURE 45-7 3 Point Coordinate System

FIGURE 45-8 Midpoint Coordinate System

X

YZ

12

3

X

YZ

1

2

445Chapter 45: Intermediate Coordinate Systems

Page 466: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 45: Intermediate

Important Topics - Intermediate Alignments• It is possible to create multiple coordinate systems and switch between

them.

• A 3-2-1 Coordinate System may be constructed using a slot.

• Two circles may be used in place of a line for a coordinate system.

• The Translation function can:

• Move the origin to a specific feature.

• Move the origin to a specific XYZ value.

• Offset the origin a specific XYZ distance from a feature.

446 Coordinate Systems

Page 467: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

PRACTICAL ExerciseStart with a new file and load the correct part preferences to work on this practical.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit.

NOTE: Loading the Metric-0.25mm file will change all the tolerances to +/-0.25mm. This will be the default value for every new feature added to CAM2 Measure.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 46-2 Load Tolerances

447Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 468: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

• Click ADD.

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 46-3 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 46-4 Adding CAD Parts

448 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 469: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

Measuring the Alignment Features

Circles 1, 3, and 7 are the features for the Alignment. Use the Measurement Template command and choose these three nominal features from the CAD model. The MEASURE TEMPLATE command automatically guides you though the measurement of the three circles.

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

FIGURE 46-5 FARO_Demo_part1.igs

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-6 Probes

449Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 470: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

3 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 46-7 Measurement Template

• Click on Circle 1 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-8 Circle 1

450 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 471: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-9 Circle 1 Results

• Click on Circle 3 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-10 Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-11 Circle 3 Results

451Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 472: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

7 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

• Click on Circle 7 on the CAD model using the mouse.

FIGURE 46-12 Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 highlights red.

FIGURE 46-13 Circle 7 Results

FIGURE 46-14 Measurement Template

452 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 473: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plan has not been measured; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command.

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

Notice that Circle 1 highlights red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

12 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

NOTE: Since two features are being measured at once (plane and circle), move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results and click OK to continue.

14 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-15 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-16 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-17 Select Plane

453Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 474: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

16 ❑ For each circle measurement, the SELECT PLANE dialog box appears.

17 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-18 Measure Circle 3

• Select a Plane = None. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-19 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-20 Measure Circle 7

454 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 475: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Setting an Iterative Alignment

1 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT RESULTS dialog box now shows the real time results of the iteration calculations. When a solution is reached the command will stop. The calculations may solve quickly and not appear to change.

FIGURE 46-21 Measurement Results

• Selected Choices = M_CIRCLE001, M_CIRCLE003, M_CIRCLE007.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-22 Iterative Alignment

455Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 476: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3-2-1

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select PLANE.

• Check the MAX ERROR of the Iterative Alignment. For this part the value should be in tolerance.

• Notice the error between each of the measured circles and its associated nominal.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 46-23 Iterative Alignment Results

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-24 Probes

456 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 477: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Measure the plane on top of the plate.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

6 ❑ Measure Sphere C.

• Take four or five points on the top of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull up off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-25 Measure XY Plane

• Label = BASE_PLANE.

• If everything looks good, press the to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-26 Plane Results

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-27 Measure Sphere C

457Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 478: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

9 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select LINE < 2D LINE.

10 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog appears.

• Label = SPHERE_C.

• If everything looks good, press the to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-28 Sphere Results

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Adapter = 0.250 shank with 1.0 offset.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-29 Probes

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE. This will be the plane to which the points are projected.

• Offset = 0.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-30 Select Plane

458 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 479: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Measure the line on the edge that is nearest Cylinder G. Start from the edge by Sphere A, working towards Sphere B.

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

13 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

• Take four or five points on the side of the plate by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-31 Measure X Axis

• Label = LINE_FRONT.

• If everything looks good, press the to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-32 Line Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select the CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-33 3-2-1 Coordinate System

459Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 480: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the 3-2-1 coordinate system is the centerpoint of the sphere.

Separate Origin

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SEPARATE ORIGIN.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Separate Origin coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the base plane.

Perpendicular Intersect

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < PERPENDICULAR INTERSECT.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-34 Separate Origin Coordinate System

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-35 Perpendicular Intersect Coordinate System

460 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 481: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the perpendicular intersection coordinate system is the center point of the sphere projected to the line.

Bore

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select CIRCLE.

2 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

3 ❑ Measure Circle 10.

• Select a Plane = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-36 Select Plane

• Take four to five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move above and to the center of the circle and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-37 Measure Circle 10

461Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 482: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < BORE.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Bore coordinate system is at the intersection of the second line with the plane.

• Label = CIRCLE010_I.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-38 Cylinder Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-39 Bore Coordinate System

462 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 483: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Line-Line

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < LINE-LINE.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin of the Line-Line coordinate system is at the intersection of the two lines projected to the plane.

Midpoint

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Line Defined X-Axis = M_LINE_FRONT.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on Line = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-40 Line/Line Intersect Coordinate System

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 46-41 Probes

463Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 484: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

3 ❑ Measure Sphere B.

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < MIDPOINT.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-42 Measure Sphere B

• Label = SPHERE_B.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-43 Sphere Results

• Select a Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Click on the toggle button next to the LINE DEFINED X AXIS toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON X AXIS and SECOND POINT ON X AXIS dropdown.

• First Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_C.

• Second Point on X Axis = M_SPHERE_B.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-44 Midpoint Coordinate System

464 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 485: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the X-axis is positive in the direction that the spheres were selected. The origin is the midpoint of the line projected to the plane.

3 Point

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

2 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface of the sphere and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 46-45 Measure Sphere D

• Label = SPHERE_D.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 46-46 Sphere Results

465Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 486: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 POINT.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the XY plane is defined by the three points. The X axis is defined by a line between sphere C and sphere B. The origin is at the centerpoint of sphere C.

3 Plane

1 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• Point on +X = M_SPHERE_B.

• Point on +XY = M_SPHERE_D.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-47 3 Point Coordinate System

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_C.

• Click the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_C.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-48 Construct Plane Perpendicular

466 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 487: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

2 ❑ Take a look at the results.

3 ❑ From the CONSTUCT menu, select PLANE > PERPENDICULAR.

• Label = PLANE_LEFT.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-49 Plane Results

• Select a Point = M_SPHERE_B.

• Click on the toggle button next to the FIRST POINT ON LINE toggle button to enable the FIRST POINT ON LINE and SECOND POINT ON LINE dropdown.

• First Point on Line = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point on Line = M_SPHERE_B.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-50 Construct Plane Perpendicular

467Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 488: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3 PLANE.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the intersection of Base plane and Front plane defines the X-axis and the origin is at the intersection of the three planes.

Set Active Coordinate System

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < SET ACTIVE.

• Label = PLANE_FRONT.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-51 Plane Results

• Select XY Plane = M_BASE_PLANE.

• Select Plane 2 = C_PLANE_FRONT.

• Select Plane 3 = C_PLANE_LEFT.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-52 3 Plane Coordinate System

• Set Active = C_COORDSYS007 (the 3 Point coordinate system).

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-53 Set Active Coordinate System

468 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 489: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Change Coordinate System

Rotation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < ROTATION.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the coordinate system was rotated so that the X axis is oriented parallel to the front of the base.

Translation

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS007.

• Line Defined axis = +Z_C_COORDSYS007.

• by = 20.2 degrees.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-54 Rotate Coordinate System

• Select X Origin = M_SPHERE_C.

• X Offset = -15.0.

• Select Y Origin = M_SPHERE_B.

• Y Offset = -15.0.

• Select Z Origin = M_CIRCLE010_I.

• Z Offset = -12.0.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS009.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 46-55 Translate Coordinate System

469Chapter 46: Intermediate Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 490: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 46: Intermediate

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: Notice that the origin was translated to the corner of the part using the X value of Sphere C, the Y value of Sphere B, and the Z value of Circle 10.

470 Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 491: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will present how to establish coordinate systems when information on the datums are limited. After completing this section, the student will be able to use constructions to establish coordinate systems.

Calculated Coordinate SystemThere will be situations in which the datum information is sufficient to define a coordinate system (plane, line, and point), but the origin is not located at the datums. The datums are structured such that using a rotation and translation technique would be extremely difficult, if not impossible.

In the situation described below, a coordinate system will be established using the indicated datums. The print also indicates that locations should be used to define the datums instead of directly measuring the datum features. The information from this print will be used to construct datum features from the specified targets.

FIGURE 47-1 Print with Datum Targets

B

B

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

A

50 50

C1B1A1

B2A2

A310

C

B

135

35.35

471Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

Page 492: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 47: Advanced C

CAD=PartThis function requires that some type of coordinate system on the part has been constructed using measured features. Selecting CAD=PART sets the current coordinate system equal to the CAD or Nominal coordinate system (also called the world coordinate system) and moves all the measured data to the CAD coordinate system. The measurements are then overlaid onto the CAD or nominal data.

To use CAD=PART, the coordinate system on the part must match the coordinate system of the CAD. In many cases, the origin of the coordinate system will not be on the part, and a translation or rotation will be necessary to get the coordinate system to the correct location.

Constructions2 Offset Line

This function constructs a (typically a coordinate axis) where there is a known offset. When a part defines a datum with two target location and the points do not lie on the datum line, the Construct Line, 2 Offset command may be used to construct the line. This command may also be used as rotate function by entering the offset values instead of the rotation angle. The offset direction is always to the right side of the two points.

FIGURE 47-2 2 Point 2 Offset Line

1

2

472oordinate System

Page 493: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 Offset Plane

This function constructs a plane (typically a coordinate plane) where there is more than one for the points. When a part defines a datum with three target locations and the points do not lie on the datum plane, the Construct Plane, 3 Offset command may be used to construct the plane. The plane is constructed above or below the selected points. The order that the points are selected is used to determine the offset direction. Use the right-hand rule to determine the offset direction.

Important Topics - Advanced Coordinate Systems

• There are two possible solutions in the three-point, three-offset plane construction. Use the right hand rule to determine the correct offset direction.

• The CAD=PART function needs to be performed after the translation.

FIGURE 47-3 3 Point 3 Offset Plane

2

1

3

473Chapter 47: Advanced Coordinate System

Page 494: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 495: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

PRACTICAL EXERCISEStart with a new file and load the correct part preferences for this practical.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

FIGURE 48-1 Print with Datum Targets

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-2 Drawing Units

B

B

THIS DRAWING AND ALL THE INFORMATION THERIN IS THE PROPERTY OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWING IS CONFIDENTIAL AND MAY NOT BE MADE PUBLIC OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT THE EXPRESS PERMISSION OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES, INCORPORATED. THIS DRAWINGIS LOANED SUBJECT TO RETURN UPON DEMAND AND SHALL NOT BE USED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE INTERESTS OF FARO TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED.

THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS TOLERANCES ARE: X .X .XX .XXX ANGLE±0.25 ±0.1 ±0.05 ±0.01 ±1°

INTERPRET DRAWING PER DOD-STD-100 AND ASME Y14.5. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING

TITLE

Armed with Quality

BASE, DEMO FIXTURE

THREADS IN ACCORDANCE WITH HANDBOOK 28

FINSH REQUIRED63

A

50 50

C1B1A1

B2A2

A310

C

B

135

35.35

475Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 496: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 48-3 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 48-4 FARO CAD Translator

476oordinate Systems Practical

Page 497: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

8 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part3.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 48-5 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 48-6 FARO_Demo_Part3.igs

477Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 498: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

Nominal Alignments on the CAD

Constructing Nominal Objects

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < NOMINAL.

2 ❑ Choose the direction of the plane.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• CAM2 Measure will create a plane with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click 3 points on the bottom surface to define a plane for Datum A. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 48-7 Construct XY Plane

• Click the LEFT mouse button to toggle the vector so that it points up.

• Click the RIGHT mouse button to accept the vector.

FIGURE 48-8 Choose Direction Vector

• Label = PLANE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-9 Nominal Plane Results

478oordinate Systems Practical

Page 499: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < NOMINAL.

NOTE: Since a nominal line was selected only one point is required to define the line.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select CIRCLE < NOMINAL.

• CAM2 Measure will create a line with 2 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom sur-face to define a line for Datum B. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 48-10 Construct X Axis

• Label = LINE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-11 Nominal Line Results

• CAM2 Measure will create a circle with 3 points.

• Use the mouse to click a point on the bottom sur-face to define a circle for Datum C. Watch the PROMPT BAR for instructions.

FIGURE 48-12 Construct X Intercept

479Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 500: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

NOTE: Since a nominal circle was selected only one point is required to define the circle.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Constructing a Nominal Alignment

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM > 3-2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

NOTE: The coordinate system may not be correct. If the nominal line that defines the X axis is pointing in the wrong direction, flip the direction of the nominal line.

Flipping Vectors

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Select N_LINE001.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the results.

FIGURE 48-13 Nominal Circle Results

• Select a Plane = N_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane= +XY.

• Line Defined axis = N_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = N_CIRCLE001.

• Select NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-14 Nominal Coordinate System

480oordinate Systems Practical

Page 501: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

3 ❑ Click the FLIP VECTOR button.

4 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

Construct the Plane

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select SPHERE.

3 ❑ Measure Sphere A.

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 48-15 Probes

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 48-16 Measure Sphere A

481Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 502: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Measure Sphere D.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

• Label = SPHERE_A.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key button twice to reject. Then re measure the results.

FIGURE 48-17 Sphere Results

• Take four or five points around the sphere by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 48-18 Measure Sphere D

• Label = SPHERE_D.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 48-19 Sphere Results

482oordinate Systems Practical

Page 503: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

8 ❑ Measure a surface point on top of the base near the A3 target.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Construct the Plane

Construct the XY plane with three offsets using the known Z values on the table.

• Take three or four points by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 48-20 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT_A3.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 48-21 Point Results

Datum Features

X Y Z

M_SURFPT_A3 25.0

M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4

M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

A310

483Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 504: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select PLANE < 3 OFFSETS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the plane. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

NOTE: There are two solutions to the constructed plane. Depending on the selection order of the features, the constructed plane will be above or below the features. Using the right hand rule, selecting a counter clockwise direction places the plane on one side, selecting clockwise direction puts it on the other side.

Construct the Line

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select LINE < 2 OFFSETS.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the line. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

• Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.

• First Point Offset = 35.4.

• Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point Offset = 35.4.

• Select Third Point = M_SURFPT_A3.

• Third Point Offset = 25.0.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-22 Construct Plane 3 Offsets

• Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.

• Select First Point = M_SPHERE_A.

• First Point Offset = -50.0.

• Select Second Point = M_SPHERE_D.

• Second Point Offset = 50.0.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-23 Construct Line 2 Offsets

484oordinate Systems Practical

Page 505: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: There are two possible solutions to the 2 Offset line. The offset is to the right of the line looking from the first selected point to the second selected point. The location of the line depends on which point is selected first.

Complete the Coordinate System

1 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < 3-2-1.

2 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

3 ❑ From the CONSTRUCT menu, select COORDINATE SYSTEM < TRANSLATION.

• Select a Plane = C_PLANE001.

• Direction of Plane = +XY.

• Line Defined Axis = C_LINE001.

• Direction of Axis = +X.

• Select Origin = M_SPHERE_A.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-24 3-2-1 Coordinate System

• Select X Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• X Offset = 135.0.

• Select Y Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Y Offset = 50.0.

• Select Z Origin = C_COORDSYS001.

• Z Offset = -35.4.

• Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS001.

• Select CONSTRUCTED toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-25 Translate Coordinate System

485Chapter 48: Advanced Coordinate Systems Practical

Page 506: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 48: Advanced C

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the coordinate system.

5 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select CAD = PART.

6 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

Verify Alignment

1 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select INSPECT XYZ.

• Verify that the origin is in the bottom left corner of the base by moving the SMR over the part and watching the computer screen.

• Press the HOME key or the ESC key to end the command.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

3 ❑ Complete the missing data on the table. The initial known values given to you should be exact.

• Measured Coordinate System = C_COORDSYS002.

• Nominal Coordinate System = N_COORDSYS001.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 48-26 CAD=Part Alignment

Datum Features

X Y Z

M_SURFPT_A3 25.0

M_SPHERE_D 50.0 35.4

M_SPHERE_A -135.0 -50.0 35.4

486oordinate Systems Practical

Page 507: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

• OBJECTIVE - The instructor will demonstrate how to use nominal and surface data to align a coordinate system. After completing this section, the student will know how to use the Feature and Surface Point Alignment.

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by the features that may be used and how the error is distributed in the alignment. The part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session determines the best alignment.

Feature AlignmentFeature alignment uses three point-reducible features to give a more exact alignment without best-fitting. The measurements are only as good as the alignment. An alignment with large error will yield poor measurement results.

When the alignment error is high, the measured alignment features do not match their nominals. The only way to troubleshoot high alignment error is to create an CAD to PART alignment. One of the easiest ways to do that is by doing a Feature alignment.

A Feature alignment is accomplished by selecting a Primary, Secondary, and Tertiary feature.

The Feature alignment takes the Primary feature and matches it with its nominal.

3

2

3

2

1

1

487Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Page 508: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

Then it takes the Secondary Feature and rotates it into the line between the Primary nominal and the Secondary nominal.

Finally, CAM2 Measure X rotates the Tertiary feature about that same line until the tertiary feature is in the same plane as the Tertiary nominal.

3

2

32

1

3

3

1

2

2

488AD to PART Alignments

Page 509: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

The results are as follows:

• The Primary feature has zero deviation.

• The Secondary feature has deviation along the line from primary to secondary nominals.

• The Tertiary feature has deviation in the plane of all three nominal features.

Iterative Alignment with Surface PointsThe previous training courses introduce the Iterative, or Best Fit alignment. Those practical exercises use simple point reducible features. CAM2 Measure X is able to use Surface Points and an associated nominal surface for the alignment.

When using surfaces to align to a part at least three surface regions that are roughly to each other must be selected. The 3-2-1 requirement (plane, line, point) must be satisfied when arranging the surface points.

A minimum of 6 surface points should be taken when measuring a nominal surface for an alignment.

Iterative Alignment with Not Used ValuesWhen to Use This Technique

• When the print specifies that only some of the values are used for a particular datum.

• When one of the datums is a round slot that is to a coordinate axis. That coordinate axis is not used in the calculation.

• When a bore center line is used as a datum and the center line is parallel to a coordinate axis.

• When a surface that is parallel to a coordinate plane is used as a datum and no surface is provided.

• When one of the alignment features has a very error in one or

two coordinate axis and there is enough information to fully constrain.

489Chapter 49: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments

Page 510: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 49: Advanced C

Watch Out!

If you don’t specify enough values for each coordinate axis, then the part will be . You must shoot for a 3-2-1 situation where:

At least 3 Points use one Axis (For example: X)

At least 2 Points use a second Axis (For example: Y)

At least 1 Point must use the last Axis (Z)

If the alignment is under constrained, then the alignment may because

there is more than one solution.

Due to best-fit limitations, at least one point must use the coordinate

axes.

Important Topics - Advanced CAD to Part Alignments

• The number of points selected in an Iterative alignment will have an impact on the processing time for the alignment.

• The Feature alignment error at each point may be viewed in Review Features.

• The surface point can fall off the surface causing the alignment error to grow larger rather than solving.

490AD to PART Alignments

Page 511: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

This section covers several different types of best-fit, CAD-to-PART alignments. They vary from one another by how the error is distributed in the alignment and the features that may be used.

REMEMBER: The alignment used will be determined by the part datum structure and the goal of the measurement session.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Feature Alignment1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-1 Drawing Units

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-2 Load Tolerances

491Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 512: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

6 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

7 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

8 ❑ Select CIRCLE from the Add a Nominal drop-down window.

9 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

X Y Z Diameter

Circle 9 0.0 0.0 0.0 100.0

Circle 1 0.00 70.0 0.0 20.0

Circle 3 70.0 0.0 0.0 20.0

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = 0.25 diameter pin nest.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-3 Probes

• X= 0.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 100.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-4 Construct Circle Enter Values

492AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 513: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

10 ❑ Take a look at the results.

11 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

12 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE009.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 50-5 Circle results

• X= 0.0, Y = 70.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-6 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 50-7 Circle results

493Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 514: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

13 ❑ Click the KEY IN button .

14 ❑ Take a look at the results.

15 ❑ Click OK to run the template.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not been measured a plane; however, CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. This is accomplished by selecting NONE in the Select a Plane dialog

16 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• X= 70.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0, Diameter = 20.00.

• I = 0, J = 0, K = 1.

• Coordinate System = *WORLD*.

• Select the NOMINAL toggle button.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-8 Construct Circle Enter Values

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept the cir-cle.

FIGURE 50-9 Circle results

• Select a Plane = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-10 Select Plane

494AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 515: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Measure Circle 9.

18 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

19 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

20 ❑ Measure Circle 1.

21 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-11 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-12 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-13 Measure Circle 1

495Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 516: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

22 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

23 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

24 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

25 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select FEATURE.

26 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

27 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

• Select M_CIRCLE009.

• View Style = Tabular.

• Enter the Deviation values for X, Y and Z into the following table.

• Repeat for M_CIRCLE001 and M_CIRCLE003.

• Select a Plane = NONE.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-14 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-15 Measure Circle 3

• Primary Point = M_CIRCLE009_I.

• Secondary Point = M_CIRCLE001_I.

• Tertiary Point = M_CIRCLE003_I.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-16 Feature Alignment

496AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 517: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

NOTE: Circle 9 will have zero deviation, Circle 1 will have deviation along the Y axis, and Circle 3 will have deviation along the X and Y axis.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Surface Points

Secure the black plastic shell on top of the plate.

Deviation X Deviation Y Deviation Z

M_CIRCLE009_I

M_CIRCLE001_I

M_CIRCLE003_I

FIGURE 50-17 FARO Shell

FARO Standard Demonstration Part - ShellISO View

497Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 518: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

2 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

3 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 50-18 FARO CAD Translator

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = Shell1.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-19 Adding CAD Parts

498AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 519: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

5 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < SURFACE POINT.

6 ❑ Measure point 1.

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• SMR = SMR of diameter 1.5 inch.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-20 Probes

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-21 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-22 Point Results

1

499Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 520: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

8 ❑ Measure point 2.

9 ❑ Take a look at the results.

10 ❑ Measure point 3.

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-23 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT002.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-24 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-25 Measure Surface Point

2

3

500AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 521: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

11 ❑ Take a look at the results.

12 ❑ Measure point 4.

13 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = SURFPT003.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-26 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by press-ing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-27 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT004.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-28 Point Results

4

501Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 522: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

14 ❑ Measure point 5.

15 ❑ Take a look at the results.

16 ❑ Measure point 6.

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-29 Measure Surface Point

• Label = SURFPT005.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key button to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-30 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the surface by pressing the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the sur-face and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-31 Measure Surface Point

5

6

502AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 523: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

17 ❑ Take a look at the results.

Using Surfaces as Nominals

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

2 ❑ Click on the NOMINALS tab.

3 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT003.

4 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

5 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

6 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT004 through M_SURFPNT005.

• Label = SURFPT006.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-32 Point Results

• Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-33 Surface 1

503Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 524: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

504

7 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button .

8 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

9 ❑ Select M_SURFPNT006.

10 ❑ Click the FROM SCREEN button ,

11 ❑ Click OK to accept the nominal surface.

12 ❑ Click OK to exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-34 Surface 2

• Using the mouse select the surface on the side of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-35 Surface 3

AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 525: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

13 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

The alignment calculations stop when the smallest error, between the measured points and the nominal surfaces is found.

14 ❑ Click OK to accept the alignment.

15 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT < INSPECT SURFACE.

• Touch anywhere on the part and press the INSERT key.

• Pull away from the part and press the HOME key.

16 ❑ Take 2 more points on the FARO shell.

NOTE: Surface point alignment is appropriate when aligning to a part with less than three, or no point-reducible features that have CAD surfaces.

PRACTICAL EXERCISE - Iterative Alignment with Not Used ValuesIn this case, the X value of circle 1, the Y value of circle 3 and 7, and the Z values of the surface points will be used to construct an alignment.

1 ❑ From the FILE menu, select NEW.

2 ❑ Click NO to save changes.

• Select M_SURFPNT001 through M_SURFPNT006.

• Set Weights = unchecked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-36 Iterative Alignment

• Drawing Units = Millimeters.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-37 Drawing Units

505Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 526: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

3 ❑ From the FILE menu, select PREFERENCES.

4 ❑ Click OK to accept the preferences.

5 ❑ From the FILE menu, select select TRANSLATE CAD FILES. This starts another application - CAM2 Measure X is still running.

The FARO CAD Translator creates a new file in the FARO CAD Data format on your computer.

• From the PART PREFERENCES, click LOAD.

• Choose the Metric-0.25mm.xpp file.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-38 Load Tolerances

• Click ADD

• Navigate to the CAM2 Measure X/Tutorial directory.

• Files of type = IGES files (*.igs; *.iges).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.igs.

• Click OPEN.

• Click TRANSLATE.

• Click CLOSE.

FIGURE 50-39 FARO CAD Translator

506AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 527: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

6 ❑ From the FILE menu, select INSERT < CAD PARTS.

7 ❑ From the VIEW menu, select ZOOM < ALL to fit the CAD model in the screen.

• Files of type = FARO CAD Data files (*.fcm).

• Choose Filename = FARO_Demo_Part4.fcm.

• Click OPEN.

FIGURE 50-40 Adding CAD Parts

FIGURE 50-41 FARO_Demo_Part4.igs

507Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 528: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

Measurement Template

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select MEASUREMENT TEMPLATE.

3 ❑ Add Circle 1 to the Measurement Template.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = 0.250 shank with 1.0 off-set.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-42 Probes

• From the ADD A NOMINAL drop-down select Circle.

• Select the FROM SCREEN button.

FIGURE 50-43 Measurement Template

• Using the mouse click on Circle 1 of the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-44 Circle 1

508AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 529: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

4 ❑ Take a look at the results.

5 ❑ Add Circle 3 to the Measurement Template.

6 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• Label = CIRCLE001.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 50-45 Circle 1 Results

• Using the mouse click on Circle 3 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-46 Circle 3

• Label = CIRCLE003.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1 and Circle 3 will be high-lighted red.

FIGURE 50-47 Circle 3 Results

509Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 530: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

7 ❑ Add Circle 7 to the Measurement Template.

8 ❑ Take a look at the results.

9 ❑ Right mouse click on the CAD screen to accept the three circles and return to the Measurment Template.

10 ❑ Click OK to measure the three circles.

Remember that circles are 2D features and require a plane. A plane has not

• Using the mouse click on Circle 7 on the CAD model.

FIGURE 50-48 Circle 7

• Label = CIRCLE007.

• Click OK to accept. Circle 1, Circle 3 and Circle 7 will be highlighted red.

FIGURE 50-49 Circle 7 Results

FIGURE 50-50 Measurement Template

510AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 531: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

been measured. However; CAM2 has an option to measure a plane during a 2D feature command. This is accomplished by selecting NONE in the Select a Plane dialog

11 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

Notice that Circle 1 is highlighted red. This is to guide to the correct circle.

12 ❑ Measure circle 1.

NOTE: Since you are measuring two features at once (plane and circle), make sure you move the SMR to the center of the hole and pull up and away from the top surface for compensation.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

14 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

• Select a Plane = NONE.

• Click OK.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-51 Measure Circle 1

• Select a Plane = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-52 Select Plane

511Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 532: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

15 ❑ Measure Circle 3.

16 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

17 ❑ The SELECT PLANE dialog will be displayed.

18 ❑ Measure Circle 7.

19 ❑ Click OK to accept the circle.

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-53 Measure Circle 3

• Select a Plane = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-54 Select Plane

• Take four or five points around the circle by pressing the INSERT key.

• Move above and to the center of the hole and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-55 Measure Circle 7

512AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 533: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Using Surface Points

1 ❑ From the DEVICES menu, select PROBES.

2 ❑ From the MEASURE menu, select POINT > SURFACE POINT.

3 ❑ Take a look at the results.

• SMR = 1.5 inch SMR.

• Nest = None.

• Click the OK button.

FIGURE 50-56 Probes

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pat-tern.

• Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-57 Surface Point 1

• Label = SURFPT001.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-58 Point Results

513Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 534: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

4 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

5 ❑ Take a look at the results.

6 ❑ Continue measuring surface points.

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pat-tern.

• Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-59 Surface Point 2

• Label = SURFPT002.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re-measure the point.

FIGURE 50-60 Point Results

• Take three or four points on the top surface by pressing the INSERT key in a small triangular pat-tern.

• Pull off the surface and press the HOME key.

FIGURE 50-61 Surface Point 3

514AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 535: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

7 ❑ Take a look at the results.

8 ❑ From the FILE menu, select REVIEW FEATURES.

9 ❑ Click the OK button to accept the nominal surface.

10 ❑ Click OK the exit REVIEW FEATURES.

• Label = SURFPT003.

• If everything looks good, press the INSERT key but-ton to accept the results.

• If it doesn’t look good, press the HOME key but-ton twice to reject. Then re measure the feature.

FIGURE 50-62 Point Results

• Select M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, M_SURFPT003.

• Click on the NOM-INALS tab.

• Click on the FROM SCREEN but-

ton .

• Using the mouse select the surface on the top of the CAD model. If desired, press the L hotkey to rearrange the labels.

FIGURE 50-63 Review Features

515Chapter 50: Advanced CAD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 536: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Chapter 50: Advanced C

11 ❑ From the ALIGNMENT menu, select ITERATIVE.

12 ❑ In the ITERATIVE ALIGNMENT USED VALUES dialog box, change the weights of the three circles.

NOTE: The surface points cannot be weighted. The nominal surface constrains the points to the surface normal to the surface.

13 ❑ Click OK to accept the aligment.

NOTE: Neglecting the Z values of the measured circles will only consider their X and Y location for the Iterative alignment. The surface points lock the Z values.

• Select the M_CIRCLE001_I, M_CIRCLE003_I, M_CIRCLE007_I, M_SURFPT001, M_SURFPT002, and M_SURFPT003.

• Set Weights = checked.

• Scale Option = None.

• Click OK.

FIGURE 50-64 Iterative Alignment

• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the Y and Z values for M_CIRCLE001.

• Left mouse click on the check marks to turn off the X and Z values for M_CIRCLE003 and M_CIRCLE007.

• Click OK and wait for the alignment to solve.

FIGURE 50-65 Set Weights

516AD to PART Alignments Practical

Page 537: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

Answer Key

13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . large14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . horizontal15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . blink15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hot keys22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . buttons22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Command29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . accurate29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviations30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . corrects31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . repeatability45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Features45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3D Features46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Select Plane47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . surfaces61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . datum61 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . several62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CMM62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . aligned62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . established63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point reducible95 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurements113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . same113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . changed113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3113 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . additional114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . disturbed114 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XY195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . YZ195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XZ195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . perpendicular195 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surface Point196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home in196 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cosine error215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . arcs215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . circles215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D lines215 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slots267 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . deviation286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . infinite

517

Page 538: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right angle286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . plane286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . interfere286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coordinate system286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nominal286 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tolerances309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . polylines309 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . minimum310 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sort323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target points323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . online323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offline323 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . measurement instructions371 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . automate405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . program405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . quality405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . icon406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . location406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . green406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . red406 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . shadow417 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . player418 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . touch427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . first427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . convert427 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . trends428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . time428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . one428 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision442 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2-1443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate Origin443 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Perpendicular Intersect444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line-Line Intersect444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bore444 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Plane445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Point445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MidPoint445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . right445 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . relative471 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target

518

Page 539: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Basic Measurement Training WorkbookVersion 1.0 - January 2008

472 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line473 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . offset487 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . exact489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . orthogonal489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . parallel489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CAD489 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . under constrained490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . flip490 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . all

519

Page 540: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 541: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~
Page 542: 08m13e07 - CAM2 Laser Tracker Measu~

Contact Information

For Technical Support

World Wide Web site: www.faro.comE-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.2771

For Sales Inquiries

Electronic Product Catalog on www.faro.comE-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.0234, extension 2265

For Training or Technical Services

E-mail: [email protected] Number: 800.736.0234, extension 1111